Go Back   Movie Fan Central Discussion Forums > Movie Talk! > Horror Movie talk
MOVIE FAN CENTRAL FAQ Members List Calendar Search Today's Posts Mark Forums Read

Reply
 
Thread Tools Display Modes
  #1  
Old 05-19-2012, 12:08 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - full closure to entire series

In 2008, I wrote and posted here two fan-fiction sequels to the "Halloween" series. One for the H6 storyline and the other for the H20 storyline. It was Rob Zombie's remake of "Halloween" that finally inspired to do it. I had wanted to do provide closure to the series since 2002.

In 2009, I did the impossible. Fans on this website spoke about how broken the series had become in the early 2000's and wondered how to fix it. And back then, we couldn't figure out to do it. It was in 2009 when I thought about the story holes again and figured out a plausible explanation for Laurie Strode having children in separate storylines. Explaining the remaining story holes came easy. Much of it is explained by a cover-up by the Druid cult from H6. And speaking of H6 or H666: The Producer's Cut, don't worry. The Druid cult stays in the shadows in H9 and lets Michael work alone. Story-wise, it makes sense. They stepped in Michael's way in H6 and royally pissed him off. Although the cult serves an important purpose in the story, they have minimal involvement.

For multiple reasons, I did not end up posting H9 three years ago. It doesn't matter why anymore. One reason that seriously factored in was its length. At 323 pages, it is not overlong for what is. There was a lot of groundwork and story holes to cover. But it was - and is - too much to post here. I went over it again last year and reduced to 181 pages. Kept the most important scenes and summarized the remainder of it. For all that effort, there are a lot juicy scenes I hated leaving out, but this is the only reasonable way to post the story on this board.

And here it is. "Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers." Both storylines put back together. John Strode from H20 meeting his cousins Kara and Danny Strode, as well as Tommy Doyle, from H6. Reduced from 323 pages to 181 pages. Shorter but not incoherent to follow. Not written in the proper screen format, but easy to follow nonetheless. At appropriate times, I refer to the camera, music, the screen fading in and out, you name it. I wrote it, so it would feel like you were there in the movie theater seeing it for real. If anyone out there still cares about the older H-series and bothers to read this, I hope you enjoy it. On with the show.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 05-19-2012 at 12:12 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #2  
Old 05-19-2012, 12:25 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 1

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to a dark screen. Before the movie begins, a message appears: The following film is intended as a sequel to “Halloween” (1978), “Halloween II” (1981), “Halloween 4: The Return of Michael Myers” (1988), “Halloween 5: The Revenge of Michael Myers” (1989), “Halloween 666: The Producer’s Cut” (1995), “Halloween: H20” (1998) and “Halloween: Resurrection” (2002).

-Cut to the dark screen. It slowly begins fading in. The screen finally fades in, ultimately revealing a dark setting lit by candles. Present in the middle of the dark setting is an alter. Standing before the alter are Druid members dressed in robes and hoods. And standing behind the alter is the leader of the Druid cult. The point of view of a camera begins panning up to the Druid leader, and the date “October 1957” appears. Ultimately taking place is a ceremony.

-The camera pans up to the alter and stays put. Within the darkness, the Druid leader displays no mistakable features. Also dressed in a black robe, his/her hood looks from his/her left and right at all the members. Finally, he speaks up. And what is heard is a deep voice of an older, aging man.

Druid Leader: “Samhain is now upon us and showing itself in the stars is Thorn. It is now official, Thorn has been reborn once again. Within days ago, a child was born. And that child bears the marking of Thorn…”

Deleted content: Right off the bat, I start off the movie from the point of view of the Druid cult. This opening sequence begins in the year Michael was born in and continues with more ceremonies in the following years: 1963, 1968 (an off-year for Michael), 1972 (another off-year), 1978, 1984 (an off-year), 1988, 1989, 1995, 1998, 2001 and 2002. This automatically begins the process of connecting the dots between the H6 storyline and H20 storyline.

Deleted content: It also answers a nagging question that will be later asked by the main characters: Just how did Michael track Laurie down in 1998 and 2001? Simple. In 1998, the Druid cult showed up at the Myers house and left directions for the home of Marion Witherton a.k.a. Marion Chambers, the nurse from H2 and later seen in H20. This leads Michael to discovering the hidden file on his sister. In 2001, the cult showed up at the Myers house again and simply just leave directions for the institution Laurie was placed in.

Deleted content: One important thing concerns the way Dr. Wynn, as well as his newly-introduced daughter Melinda, play into things. Dr. Wynn became the new cult leader in 1963 and his grown-up daughter was supposed to take over for him in 1995. She was also supposed to take over her father’s position at Smith’s Grove. However, Dr. Wynn personally saw to it that his old friend Dr. Loomis became the next cult leader instead. He believed the responsibility would make Loomis stronger again. Unfortunately, Dr. Loomis was too old, too ill and too weak to carry on the responsibility, and Dr. Wynn was stuck watching over Michael until the next Halloween. More on Dr. Loomis’ fate later. In the meantime, Melinda Wynn finally becomes the new cult leader in 1998 and is the one responsible for pointing Michael in his sister’s direction again after twenty years. It is also her decision to begin covering up what happened in Haddonfield from 1988 to 1995. This leads to one more ceremony.

-The screen fades out and then fades back in to reveal one last ceremony taking place. The date “October 2005” appears.

Melinda Wynn: “Samhain is now upon us and showing itself in the stars is Thorn. It has now been ten years since Thorn was supposed to live up to the first part of its destiny. Over time, Thorn has warmed up to our new direction and is waiting. Waiting for the opportunity to finish what it started. After many years and after much patience, as well as impatience, I’m granting Thorn that. This season, I don’t plan on pointing Thorn in the direction of its remaining targets. I plan on pointing Thorn’s remaining targets towards Haddonfield. In four days, I set out to accomplish what my father tried and failed to do…”

-The screen begins fading out. It fades back in, ultimately revealing darkness as well as a pumpkin. A pumpkin carved with the Thorn symbol. Opening credits begin appearing and the eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. The title “Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers” appears, and the eerie theme plays on. As the opening credits begin playing out, and as the eerie theme rolls on, the camera begins panning up to the pumpkin.

-As the opening sequence plays out, the camera slowly pans up to the pumpkin. It pans close up to the front of the pumpkin and eventually stops in its tracks. The remaining opening credits appear and the eerie “Halloween” theme plays out. The candle within the pumpkin burns out and the screen completely fades to black.

Deleted content: After the opening credits sequence, I re-introduce the main character in witness protection. John Tate is living on his own and has an ordinary office job. Tommy is living with Kara and Danny, and ultimately is a member of the family by now. Tommy works at a book store and Kara is a psychologist who runs her own private practice. Meanwhile, Danny seems all alone in school and very bored. On top of that, Tommy takes home a weird occult book. Could he possibly know something is up?

Deleted content: Things get interesting when John receives a strange e-mail from Kara…and when Kara receives an equally strange e-mail from John. How could this be? They are not supposed to know about each other. This leads to John meeting up with Kara, Danny and Tommy at a motel in Stanton, Missouri on October 30th. But first, we are re-introduced to grown up Lindsey Wallace in Haddonfield, Illinois.

-Cut to the local hardware store. Lindsey, revealed to be a woman in her thirties, pulls her SUV up to it and parks at the side of the road (…Rrrrr…). She gets out of her SUV and walks over to the store.

-Inside is the store owner, Drew Mackenzie, stocking some power tools on the back wall. To the right are a few shelves holding more hardware supplies. Also along the left wall is a display with Halloween masks. Notably, none of them is the infamous one worn by Michael Myers. Lindsey enters the store and greets him.

Lindsey Wallace: “Morning, Drew.”

-Drew walks over behind the counter. Now in full view, he is revealed to be an older man in his forties.

Drew Mackenzie: “Hi, Lindsey. Back already for more supplies or returning any? I will give you a full refund on anything you don’t use.”

-Lindsey walks up to the counter.

Lindsey Wallace: “Back for more actually. When I’m through with that house, I don’t think there will be any tools left in your store.”

Drew Mackenzie: “You don’t say?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I’m sure of it. From the outside, you might think it just needs a paint job. But inside, it needs a lot of work. No has lived there in so long. Nobody has taken care of it.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m sure you’re right.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah, it’s a lot of work. Well, here’s the list.”

-Lindsey hands Drew a slip of paper with a list of needed tools and supplies. Drew takes a look at it and shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “Huh. As long as you know of the names of these nuts and bolts, you must really know your way around this stuff. And my whole store by now. I’m surprised.”

Lindsey Wallace: “So am I. I’m actually surprised in my own abilities to do this. I ended up learning a lot from Benny when we were…”

-Lindsey, realizing where she’s going, hesitates. Drew, knowing what she means, looks on. He then speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, I’ll go put this list together, so you can get to work.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh, take your time. I’m going over to the diner for a bite.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Whatever you say.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Thanks.”

-Lindsey turns to leave. Drew looks down at the list, and then speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “I should probably warn you. He stopped here earlier as I was opening the store…”

-Lindsey stops and turns to Drew questionably.

Drew Mackenzie: “…I think he said that he too was headed for diner.”

Lindsey Wallace: “If you’re talking about Benny, you don’t have to warn me. I run into him almost every day at the diner. It’s always bad timing with us. But I’m okay. I can deal with him. Thanks for looking out for me anyway.”

Drew Mackenzie: “No problem.”

-Lindsey turns to leave again. Drew watches as she walks over to the door. He then speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “Hey, listen…”

-Lindsey stops and turns to Drew again.

Drew Mackenzie: “I didn’t know how to say this the other day. And should you come in again tomorrow, I would rather be up front with you about it today.”

Lindsey Wallace: “What is it?”

-Drew turns Lindsey for a moment, then steps out from the counter.

Drew Mackenzie: “That house has been sitting there for well over twenty years. And for almost thirty. I can’t help but wonder if you’re trying to make a point by suddenly renovating it. Are you?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Why? What kind of point would I be making?”

-Drew begins approaching Lindsey.

Drew Mackenzie: “I remember that night. You must remember it as well. I was sixteen when it happened, and both you and Tommy were kids…”

-Drew steps up to Lindsey and stops.

Drew Mackenzie: “…You don’t have to repair that house to tell us how you feel. We all feel the same way. After that Halloween and nearly every damn Halloween that followed, this town hasn’t been the same. Every time we think it’s safe to celebrate the holiday again, it strikes back at us. It’s only been three years since the last Halloween. You don’t have to go out of your way to cope with it. You still have me. You know that, right?”

-Lindsey turns to Drew for a moment, then speaks up.

Lindsey Wallace: “I do. And it’s okay. I’m not trying to make a point. If I was, I’d be renovating the Myers house instead.”

-Drew shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “I hope not…”

Lindsey Wallace: “I know what you mean, though. And thanks. You mean a lot to me, too. And even Benny. We’ll work it out.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m sure both of you will.”

Lindsey Wallace: “You want to know how I feel about all this and Halloween? It’s all in the past. And every time I wake up in the morning and step out of my house, the first thing I see is that damn house. What that house represents is the past. If we’re going to move on, so should the Doyle house. And as long as I am a realtor in Haddonfield, I would like to sell it one day. To a nice family looking for a nice place to live and grow up in. That is my interest in renovating it. And what better time to do it than on Halloween? I’m not afraid. Are you?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Certainly not. That’s actually a very interesting perspective. I never thought of it that way before. I just hope I don’t find you buying tools to repair the Myers house next year.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I wouldn’t dream of it. We’re better off tearing that house down, so that people will stop coming by to see it and ask us question we don’t know how to answer. We’re a small town, not a circus.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Heard that.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Well, I’ll be back for my order in a little bit.”

Drew Mackenzie: “See you then.”

-Lindsey turns to leave and Drew heads back over to the counter. Lindsey exits the store and walks over to her SUV. The camera pans away as Lindsey gets into the SUV and starts the ignition (Rrrrrrrrrr!...). The camera follows the SUV as it pulls onto the street and starts down the block. It follows the SUV to the end of the block as it pulls into the parking lot of a diner.

-The camera then begins panning back towards the car as it parks. It pans closer to it as Lindsey steps out of the SUV and shuts her door. And it follows her as she walks up to the front entrance. It catches up with her as she walks up to the front door to the diner. And it follows her in as she steps inside.

-Inside, Lindsey walks past the lobby and up to the front counter. Behind it is the owner, Earl Young. He is African-American and in his fifties. Lindsey greets him.

Lindsey Wallace: “Morning, Earl.”

Earl Young: “Morning, Lindsey. What will it be, a fine dining experience or take out?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Take out. Sorry. I’m busy working on the Doyle house.”

Earl Young: “So, I’ve heard. I just hope you know what you’re getting yourself into.”

-Lindsey, getting the feeling that he is patronizing her much like Drew, shrugs.
Lindsey Wallace: “I know exactly what I’m getting myself into. I’m renovating that house, so that people can live in it again. And it would also be nice if the first thing I saw outside my front door isn’t an eyesore if you know what I mean.”

Earl Young: “I do understand what you’re saying. I don’t mean to hassle you.”

Lindsey Wallace: “It’s okay.”

Earl Young: “So, what are you having?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Just a bagel and an iced tea.”

-Earl turns to Lindsey for a moment, then speaks up.

Earl Young: “You do know that there is a bagel place down the street, right?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I do. You do know that I happen to love the way make your iced tea, don’t you?”

Earl Young: “Yes, I certainly do. You remind me every day. I might as well give you my damn recipe.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh, you don’t have to. If you did, I wouldn’t have an excuse to come and see your face every day.”

Earl Young: “And I’d run out of business.”

Lindsey Wallace: “And we can’t have that.”

Earl Young: “Well, sit tight and I’ll get you your precious iced tea.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Thanks.”

-Earl walks away into the back and Lindsey stays put by the counter for a moment. As she does, a customer walks over from a booth. The customer steps up to the counter and awkwardly finds himself face to face with Lindsey.

Benny Granger: “Uh, hey, Lindsey.”

-Lindsey puts on a brave face and turns to him.

Lindsey Wallace: “Hi, Benny. How are you doing?”

-Benny, in his thirties, looks on at Lindsey and shrugs.

Benny Granger: “I’m doing all right. Um, how about you?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I’m doing just fine. Thank you for asking.”

-Earl steps out from the back with Lindsey’s order. He turns to her, then over to Benny. He looks on at Benny in a nearly threatening manner. Benny shrugs. He could cut the tension with a knife! He shrugs and turns to Lindsey.

Benny Granger: “Here, I know you’re busy with that house. Go ahead and eat up. I’ll pay for your breakfast.”

-Lindsey turns to Earl over his overprotective behavior, then back to Benny.

Lindsey Wallace: “You don’t have to.”

Benny Granger: “It’s okay. I want to. If anything, it’s the least I can do.”

-Lindsey, seeing Benny afraid to face her and Earl, backs off.

Lindsey Wallace: “Okay…”

-Lindsey turns away from Benny and over to Earl. She grabs her drink from the counter. However, the bag with her bagel is still in Earl’s hands. Earl looks on at Lindsey in a friendly manner, then over to Benny in nearly threatening one. Benny gulps. Finally, he turns back to Lindsey and hands her the bag.

Earl Young: “Have a nice day, Lindsey.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Thank you, Earl…”

-Lindsey walks away from the counter and over to the front door. Both of them watch as she exits the diner. Earl then turns his attention to Benny.

Earl Young: “I warned you not to break her heart.”

Benny Granger: “Excuse me?”

Earl Young: “When you began taking Lindsey out, I warned you not to break her heart.”

-Benny turns to Earl for a moment, then reluctantly speaks up.

Benny Granger: “Uh, yeah. Now that you remind me, I do recall you saying that…”

-Earl once again turns to Benny in the nearly threatening manner and crosses his arms.

Earl Young: “I warned you not to break her heart.”

-Benny shrugs.

Benny Granger: “Look, for your information, I didn’t break her heart. Lindsey and I, we’re just on a break. Our relationship isn’t perfect. No relationship is.”

Earl Young: “Oh, I know that relationships aren’t perfect. It’s you who isn’t.”

Benny Granger: “What’s that supposed to mean?”

-Benny bravely faces Earl. And Earl just looks on in the same nearly threatening manner.

Benny Granger: “Actually, better question. Since when is our relationship any of your business? I know that you look out for Lindsey, but so do I. I care about her a lot more than you think I do.”

Earl Young: “You’re right. That isn’t any of my business. So, why are you telling me? Why aren’t you telling her instead?”

-Earl looks on at Benny in the nearly threatening manner. And Benny tries to put on a brave face. Finally, he shrugs and hands Earl his check for his breakfast, along with a twenty dollar bill and a five dollar bill.

Benny Granger: “Here’s for her food and mine. That should cover all of it. Keep the fucking change.”

-Benny walks away in a huff and marches out the front door. Earl watches the door swing over and shut. He then mutters to himself.

Earl Young: “He better not break her heart.”

-Over at another booth are four young adults in their twenties. A waitress walks away after giving them their check.

David Ward: “…You know, so far, you wouldn’t think that this is the town Michael Myers grew up in. It’s like your ordinary small town.”

Whitney Hartley: “That’s because it is an ordinary small town. What did you expect it to be like?”

David Ward: “I don’t know. I’m just surprised how quiet and humble it is. After all the murders.”

Charlie Roderick: “Well, what town is going to embrace the murders that have taken place on nearly every Halloween?”

Whitney Hartley: “For that matter, I really hope you don’t harass the people here. They’re really nice. Especially the owner of this diner.”

David Ward: “Harass? Since when do I harass people?”

Charlie Roderick: “She has a point. You get really intense about this subject and alienate others who have no idea what you’re talking about. You come off too strong and never give them a chance to come to their own conclusions.”

David Ward: “You guys call it harassment, I call it passion. You know what my dad taught me? That you have to get up close and personal to get to the truth.”

Whitney Hartley: “How about getting to know them first?”

Charlie Roderick: “It’s okay to be passionate about it. Just try be more suttle.
It’s true, you really do get intense about it and scare people off.”

-The fourth one of them shrugs.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 05-20-2012 at 06:59 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #3  
Old 05-19-2012, 12:39 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 2

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Jesse Browning: “How intense does he get? As intense as Whitney and I in the sack?...”

-Whitney rolls her eyes.

Whitney Hartley: “Jesse…”

Jesse Browning: “…You know what you need to do? Convert your energy from your man-love for Michael Myers to the opposite sex. Then, you might actually get laid for once in your life! Maybe then everyone else will be able to relate to your intensity! Join the club, man! Step into the real world! This town hasn’t! It’s straight out of a dated sitcom from the 1950’s. And even from the `80’s.”

Whitney Hartley: “Jesse, quiet down before somebody hears you. You promised to be on your best behavior.”

Jesse Browning: “Hey, I’m your man. Not your kid. You can’t tell me how to act.”

Whitney Hartley: “Maybe you’re not my kid. But, I am your woman. Now, will you lighten up?”

-Jesse rolls his eyes.

Jesse Browning: “Fine.”

-Whitney turns to David.

Whitney Hartley: “I take it back. You’re not the one who needs to be put on a leash.”

-Jesse turns to Whitney suggestively.

Jesse Browning: “What kind of leash are we talking about…?”

Whitney Hartley: “Jesse…”

Charlie Roderick: “Well, let’s go pay for the food and see town.”

David Ward: “Yeah, good idea.”

-All four of them get up from their booth and start walking over to the counter.

David Ward: “I’m going to talk to the owner. I have a good feeling about him.”

Charlie Roderick: “Go ahead. Just try not be yourself for once.”

David Ward: “Sure…”

-David takes the check from Charlie and leads them up to the counter. He hands the check to Earl and proceeds to pull out his wallet.

Earl Young: “Well, how was your breakfast?”

David Ward: “It was great. I have to commend you on your food and your service here. This is what every diner should be like.”

Earl Young: “Well, thank you. I’m glad you enjoyed it. I hope you’re enjoying your stay in Haddonfield.”

-David turns to the others and shrugs.

David Ward: “You see that? He even knows that we’re tourists. And he’s going out of his way to welcome us with open arms…”

-Whitney rolls her eyes. Already, David’s act is beginning to wear out. David turns back to Earl.

David Ward: “…Thank you.”

-Earl gives David back his change.

Earl Young: “You’re welcome…”

David Ward: “If you must know we’re tourists, then you probably know every face in town. Don’t you?”

Earl Young: “You could say that.”

David Ward: “If that’s true, maybe you can answer something for me…”

-Earl begins looking on at David in a suspicious manner.

David Ward: “…I know this town’s history with Halloween. It’s tragic.”

-Earl, quickly shifting from his friendly manner, crosses his arms and looks on at David in a straight-forward manner.

Earl Young: “It sure is…”

David Ward: “Do you know what’s more tragic? That there’s a cover-up to make people forget what has happened here.”

Earl Young: “You don’t say…”

David Ward: “I do. And I’m not kidding. I’m not trying to patronize you.”

Earl Young: “I’m sure you’re not…”

David Ward: “Please hear me out. There has been a conspiracy the last several years to cover up what happened here in 1988, `89 and `95. And almost everything having to do with Laurie Strode’s daughter, Jamie Lloyd. It’s as if she never existed.”

Earl Young: “You don’t say…”

David Ward: “I do. You know how I know? My dad is a researcher on criminal science. I grew up on these stories. All of them. What happened in 1963, 1978, and what would come later. In college, I wanted to write a paper on the significance of Halloween and what it used to mean in the past. When I tried looking Haddonfield up, all I got was 1963 and 1978. Nothing on the rest of it. On top of that, I discovered claims that Michael Myers hadn’t been seen in twenty years. Not until what happened in California in 1998. I mean, what do you make of that?”

-Earl continues to face David as before.

Earl Young: “I don’t know…”

-David looks at Earl for a moment, then shrugs.

David Ward: “If you don’t believe me, you can look it up. You’ll see for yourself.”

Earl Young: “I’m sure I can…”

David Ward: “Look, I’m really not trying to harass you. Everything I’m saying is true. There are people out there trying to erase part of Haddonfield’s history. How do you feel about that? Personally, I would feel insulted. The answer to moving on from tragedy is not saying it never happened. I would know. I lost my mom when I was a kid. It wasn’t easy. The only way to deal with tragedy is to cope with it. Not too long after `95, everything from 1988 to 1995 started getting scrapped. Like it no longer mattered. Aren’t you bothered by that?”

-Earl continues facing David for a moment. David bravely faces Earl. The others shrug. They could cut the tension with a knife! Finally, Earl begins speaking up.

Earl Young: “You know what bothers me? People like you who keep on coming every Halloween to stir things up.”

David Ward: “I’m not trying to stir anything up.”

Earl Young: “Yes, you are. What also bothers me is that you apparently grew up on our stories as if they were fairy tales. Well, they aren’t fairy tales. And they aren’t stories either.”

David Ward: “So, you’re confirming that they really happened?”

-Earl faces David. He then crosses his arms again and looks on in a straight-forward manner. David sighs.

David Ward: “Oh, come on. I’m not asking you to believe us. Of course it’s hard to believe. I’m just asking for one single confirmation that something happened in 1988, 1989 and 1995. Did something happen on Halloween those years or not? All you have to say is ‘yes,’ and we’re out of here.”

-Earl continues facing David as before. David bravely faces Earl. And then, Earl releases his arms and pushes their change to their end of the counter.

Earl Young: “Here’s your change.”

-Earl crosses his arms once more and looks on in the straight-forward manner. David looks on in disbelief.

David Ward: “This is not fair. You know that? Why won’t you tell me?”

-Charlie grabs the change from the counter and turns to David.

Charlie Roderick: “Come on. He’s not saying anything. Let’s go.”

-Charlie and the others start walking away from the counter. David sighs and follows them. They step out of the diner and start walking over to the parking lot.

David Ward: “What just happened in there? Was it me or him?”

Whitney Hartley: “I’d say both of you. It couldn’t have more obvious when you were pulling for the bait-and-switch.”

David Ward: “I don’t get it. He couldn’t have been nicer to us on our way in. What gives?”

Whitney Hartley: “You heard what he said. We’re not the only people to come here and harass him and everyone else in town about Halloween.”

Jesse Browning: “If you ask me, he just has a stick up his ass. Did you see the way he stood there? It’s as if he was trying to keep balance with the tree planted behind the counter!”

Whitney Hartley: “Shut up, Jesse.”

-Jesse shrugs and mocks Whitney.

Jesse Browning: “‘Shut up, Jesse,’…”

Charlie Roderick: “I don’t know, should we even go around town and talk to anyone else at this point?”

David Ward: “Of course we should. Just anybody but him again.”

Jesse Browning: “What about the part when you told him about your ‘dead’ mom? Huh? That was classic! You didn’t inform me before that she rose from the dead.”

Whitney Hartley: “I agree. I didn’t like it either when you lied to him about that.”

David Ward: “It was for dramatic effect. I have to be able to relate to the people here if I’m going to get through to them.”

Whitney Hartley: “That wasn’t dramatic. It was just wrong.”

Jesse Browning: “Hey, the way she makes brownies is what’s wrong! They couldn’t be more dry! I guess that’s what you expect from a dead mom that that’s a dry, old corpse!”

Whitney Hartley: “Jesse!”

David Ward: “Dude!”

Jesse Browning: “Hey, you asked for it as soon so you talked about your dead mom!”

-They stop at a conversion van parked in the parking lot and Whitney sighs.

Whitney Hartley: “Look, if we’re going to get through to anybody here, we have to listen to them first before assaulting them with what we know. We have to get to know them.”

-Jesse mocks Whitney.

Jesse Browning: “‘We have to get to know them’…”

-Whitney rolls her eyes. Charlie turns Jesse, then over to the others.

Charlie Roderick: “Whitney’s absolutely right. That is the only way to get the truth out of them.”

David Ward: “Sure…”

Charlie Roderick: “And how about we start by allowing anybody but David to talk to the next person we meet?”

Whitney Hartley: “I think that’s an excellent idea.”

-All four of them proceed to get into the conversion van.

David Ward: “But, why?”

Whitney Hartley: “Because you’re an ass.”

Deleted content: Now comes time for John Tate – or really John Strode at this point - to step out of witness protection and finally meet his cousins in Stanton, Missouri. He is very nervous and anxious. After meeting Kara, Danny and Tommy at the motel, they stop at a diner for a bite.

-Cut to a diner later on in the morning. Kara, Danny, John and Tommy are seated at a booth by a window, and a waitress is walking away with their orders. Seated at one side are Kara and Tommy. Seated at the other side are John and Danny. John turns to Kara and Tommy across from him, then over to Danny. He turns back Kara and Tommy, and starts speaking up.

John Strode: “Well, um, the first thing I must acknowledge is that the only one of you I immediately know of is Tommy…”

-John turns to Tommy.

John Strode: “…I know that my mother used to babysit you in Haddonfield. She talked about you.”

Tommy Doyle: “She did? I must have left quite an impression. I was a bit of a little smartass back then with a wild imagination.”

-John looks over to Kara.

John Strode: “And my mother never told me about you and your side of the family.”

Kara Strode: “Well, I can understand why. We couldn’t have seen much of each other. I was born into the family long after my uncle adopted your mother into his family. For that matter, I would have been too young to remember her. But that doesn’t change how upsetting it was to hear what happened to her. I really am sorry.”

John Strode: “It’s okay.”

Kara Strode: “But more importantly, she probably never told you about us, because she wanted to protect you. She had every right to. Especially once she faked her death in the late `80’s.”

John Strode: “In 1987.”

Kara Strode: “That’s what made hearing what happened to her afterwards that much more shocking. We already thought she was dead. Before then, our family saw less of her after her experience on Halloween. She became paranoid and distant.”

John Strode: “Oh, I know.”

Kara Strode: “Yeah…I’m not bothering you by talking about this, am I?”

John Strode: “No, not at all. If anything, to get away from my fake life and deal with reality for the first time is a nice change.”

Kara Strode: “I feel the same way. And I didn’t know for sure if she had any children…”

-Kara, realizing where she’s going, hesitates and turns to Tommy. She turns back to John and continues.

Kara Strode: “Well, what I mean is, by 1998, we didn’t know if she had any children in her new life who were also targeted.”
John Strode: “I do know what you mean. And I understand. Well, maybe you can answer some questions for me.”

Kara Strode: “Absolutely. Anything.”

John Strode: “After you contacted me…”

-Tommy immediately shrugs. After they contacted him? Seeing Kara and Danny not picking up on it, he goes along with it and listens to what “John” has to say.

John Strode: “…I tried looking up what happened to your family. I didn’t find anything. It’s not like they covered up what happened to my mother in 1978 and 1998. You can look it up and read about it. There are plenty of fanatics out there who have spun my mother’s story around. So, why are there no stories and available information on the rest of you? How did I never learn about it?”

Kara Strode: “We knew you were going to ask that. And we wish we could give you a straight answer. We are just as devastated that our stories aren’t being told.”

-Kara turns to Tommy, then back to John. And Tommy speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “It’s a cover-up. There is some kind of cover-up to erase part of the history that took place in Haddonfield. They know that they can’t erase what happened in 1963 and 1978. And especially what happened in 2002 for that matter. But starting in 1995, they started wiping out everything took place in 1988, 1989 and 1995. From every file and every database.”

John Strode: “1988 to `95?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah. Michael didn’t disappear for twenty years like they want you to believe. He first came back in 1988. Then, he came back the following year. And then, six years later. I didn’t only experience Halloween with your mom in 1978. I read about what happened in 1988 and `89. And I wound up experiencing it again in 1995.”

Kara Strode: “That was when he came after us. My uncle, your mom’s adoptive father, was a realtor in Haddonfield.”

John Strode: “I remember her telling me that.”

Kara Strode: “And my father wound up moving our family into Michael Myers’ childhood home. My uncle was never able to sell it. And my father couldn’t care less about its history. He moved us in without a care in the world.”

John Strode: “Oh my gosh…and that Halloween?...”

Kara Strode: “Yes. He murdered my mother, my father and my brother.”

John Strode: “I am so sorry…”

Tommy Doyle: “I saw him that Halloween. I was living in the house across the street and I knew they were in danger. I was able to rescue Kara and Danny. And that’s how all of three of us wound up in witness protection together. Ordinarily, they would have split me up from them, but they placed us in the same town. And eventually, I became part of the family. I’ve been looking out for them ever since.”

John Strode: “Wow. So, who is behind the cover-up? And why? That doesn’t sound right to me. You just can’t cover up half the resume of a mass murderer. What about all those other murderers out there with terrible stories to tell? In today’s day and age, the media feeds on stories like this. I would know, after what happened in 1998. This just doesn’t make sense to me.”

Kara Strode: “Imagine how we feel. We actually lived it.”

Tommy Doyle: “We don’t know who is behind it. It could be the witness protection program. It could Haddonfield. We don’t know for sure.”

John Strode: “Huh…”

Tommy Doyle: “But I have a question for you.”

John Strode: “Shoot.”

Tommy Doyle: “How did you find out about us?”

John Strode: “I didn’t.”

Kara Strode: “What?”

-John turns to Tommy, then to Kara.

John Strode: “You contacted me. You said that you knew about me and waited until there was no more heat.”

Kara Strode: “No, I didn’t.”

John Strode: “As matter of fact, you just said a moment ago that you didn’t know if Laurie Strode had children in her new life. What’s going on here?”

-John, Kara and Danny look on cluelessly at each other. Then, Tommy speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “I think I know what’s going on.”

Kara Strode: “You do?”

-Tommy turns to Kara, then over to John.

Tommy Doyle: “How did you wind up here in this little town in Missouri? Who contacted who?”

John Strode: “Kara did. She introduced herself in the message.”

-Kara looks on oddly. Tommy turns to her.

Tommy Doyle: “And how did we up here? Who contacted who?”

Kara Strode: “He did. John did. You saw the message yourself. I had no way of contacting him or knowing he existed. Any story from 1998 to 2001 doesn’t specifically mention Laurie Strode having a child. They aren’t going to, because they would have to protect John.”

Tommy Doyle: “Exactly.”

John Strode: “So, what are you saying?”

Tommy Doyle: “Somebody wanted us to meet.”

John Strode: “Who?”

Kara Strode: “Yeah, who?”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #4  
Old 05-19-2012, 12:52 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 3

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Tommy turns to Kara and looks on at her for a moment. Kara faces him, then shrugs.

Kara Strode: “No! It be can’t true!”

-Tommy continues looking on at Kara. Kara is in disbelief.

Kara Strode: “There’s no way! You have to be wrong!”

-Tommy then turns to John.

Tommy Doyle: “Could you give us a minute?”

John Strode: “Sure…”

-Tommy turns to Kara, and she starts getting up from the table.

Tommy Doyle: “Come on…”

-Kara and Tommy both walk away from the booth and over to the front entrance of the diner. John doesn’t know what to make this. Danny, however, speaks up.

Danny Strode: “I think I know who…”

John Strode: “You do?”

-Tommy leads Kara all the way to the front entrance of the diner. She then turns to him and shrugs.

Kara Strode: “It can’t be them!”

Tommy Doyle: “Of course it could be them!”

Kara Strode: “But, we’re in witness protection! We’re safe!”

Tommy Doyle: “Are we?”

Kara Strode: “What?”

Tommy Doyle: “Are we safe from them? Who knows how deep it goes.”

Kara Strode: “You’re just talking crazy!”

Tommy Doyle: “Am I?”

Kara Strode: “Yes!”

Tommy Doyle: “Am I?

Kara Strode: “You have to be!”

-Kara sighs of frustration.

Tommy Doyle: “Look, you won’t like hearing this, but Thorn is back.”

Kara Strode: “What do you mean Thorn is back?”

Tommy Doyle: “In the stars. I explained this to you a long time ago. Whenever Thorn appears in the stars, Michael strikes. Not only that, they chose for us to meet in Missouri. Kara, we’re only one state away from Haddonfield. We have time to get there today and celebrate Halloween tomorrow if we wanted.”

Kara Strode: “So, what are you suggesting? That we go to Haddonfield and get ourselves killed?”

Tommy Doyle: “Of course not. Now that we’re onto them, we don’t have to play into their game.”

Kara Strode: “I don’t know how to believe any of this.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know it’s been a decade, but do you not remember what happened on Halloween ten years ago? We all experienced it firsthand.”

-Kara turns to Tommy for a moment, then shrugs.

Kara Strode: “Of course, I remember! I would rather forget it than remember what happened!”

Tommy Doyle: “And what about 1998?”

Kara Strode: “What about it?”

Tommy Doyle: “You know the story. Michael was reported across the country in California. How did he find his way there? How did he find out where Laurie Strode was hiding? Did you ever wonder about that? I have!”

-Kara turns away from Tommy in disbelief.

Tommy Doyle: “Thorn has appeared every time something has happened on Halloween. What happened to us, what happened to Jamie Lloyd, what happened to Laurie Strode, and what happened in Haddonfield three years ago.”

-Kara turns to Tommy for a moment. And then, it all falls into place. She slowly looks up towards Tommy. And she finds herself collapsing onto him. Tommy holds onto her.

Kara Strode: “Tommy, what are we going to do?”

Tommy Doyle: “Simple. We stay here in Stanton. Or, go elsewhere. Whatever we do, we steer clear of Haddonfield, and we take advantage of this vacation suggested by that goddamn cult.”

Kara Strode: “All right. I can handle that. But what about John? What do we tell him?”

Tommy Doyle: “We tell him what he needs to know. Unless he wishes to know everything, we steer clear of the ghosts and goblins. He doesn’t need to know about that.”

Kara Strode: “You’re right. He doesn’t.”

Tommy Doyle: “Let’s go back to the table. And try be calm.”

Kara Strode: “All right.”

-Both of them start walking back over to their booth.

Kara Strode: “I don’t want to lie to him.”

Tommy Doyle: “Do you think he’ll believe us if we tell him?”

Kara Strode: “He’s more likely to believe in Bigfoot than what we have to say.”

Tommy Doyle: “Exactly.”

-Kara and Tommy walk back to the booth and sit down.

Kara Strode: “I’m sorry about that. I don’t know what got over me.”

John Strode: “I understand. This whole thing is overwhelming. I feel like this is a dream.”

-Kara turns to Tommy, then over to John and Danny.

Kara Strode: “Look, clearly, somebody wanted us to meet after all this time. Maybe it’s someone from witness protection. Maybe they’re doing us a favor after all the tragedy. For all we know, they set it up the way they did, so it wouldn’t look suspicious. Maybe we should be grateful for it and enjoy the time we have. They’re allowing us to reunite here in Stanton. Let’s stay and enjoy the holiday.”

-John turns to her and Tommy questionably, then speaks up.

John Strode: “That’s not a bad idea.”

Danny Strode: “Cool.”

Deleted content: Shortly after breakfast, they walk back over to the motel, and Kara and Tommy discover that their trip is far from over. The Druid cult has left a note. If they don’t return to Haddonfield, then Stephen Lloyd’s blood runs off on them. It hasn’t been addressed yet, but “Child Services” took Stephen Lloyd when they entered witness protection. Obviously, they make the difficult choice of going back to Haddonfield. Tommy shows Kara and Danny the occult book he purchased from his store and promises that he will find a way to the stop the cult. And Kara reluctantly convinces John to join them. On the first part of the way to Haddonfield, Tommy rides with Kara and Danny rides with John.

-Cut to Danny riding with John in his sports car on the way to Haddonfield .

John Strode: “So, how are old are you? Sixteen? Seventeen?”

Danny Strode: “Sixteen.”

John Strode: “Oh. I was only one year older than you are now when I first encountered him. I believe my mother and her sister were the same age as well.”

-Danny turns to John for a moment, then to the road. He then speaks up.

Danny Strode: “Well, I was six when I first saw him.”

John Strode: “That’s right. Yeah. 1995. When you believe in one thing for a long time, and someone suddenly tells you something completely different, you don’t know what to think.”

-John looks on for a moment, then speaks up.

John Strode: “Well, you would have been a kid then. I was six years old when my mother faked her death and brought me and my father into witness protection. I don’t remember a thing from then. Do you still remember?”

Danny Strode: “Vividly.”

John Strode: “Sorry to hear that. I hope I’m not bothering you.”

Danny Strode: “You’re not. I know more at my age than all other teenagers. It’s a dark, dark world out there.”

John Strode: “Yes, it certainly is.”

Danny Strode: “What about your father?”

John Strode: “What about him?”

Danny Strode: “Did Michael go after him too?

John Strode: “Oh, no. He’s still okay. He and my mother separated before then. By the early `90’s, he was sick and tired of her paranoia. I don’t talk to him anymore.”

Danny Strode: “Why not?”

John Strode: “Well, you could say that he has plenty of issues of his own. You can consider what I’ll tell you next a family secret…”

-In the SUV, Kara turns to Tommy then back to the road. She speaks up.

Kara Strode: “I’ve been going over this in my head, and I still don’t know what to say…”

-Tommy puts the occult book down.

Tommy Doyle: “You don’t know how to tell John, do you?”

Kara Strode: “No, I don’t. And I feel sick to my stomach over all the lies I’ve told him already.”

Tommy Doyle: “Don’t worry about it. When the time comes, you’ll know. And I’ll know, too. There’s a lot of weird details only I will know how to fill in.”

Kara Strode: “Do you know how he’s going to feel as soon as we tell him? Deceived! Do you realize, in the back of his mind, he might be wondering if we’re a bunch of fanatics who found out about him and are leading him on? And so far, we have no proof to say we aren’t. We could have provided those I.D.’s.”

Tommy Doyle: “You’re absolutely right. We have no proof yet. But there is proof at Haddonfield.”

Kara Strode: “There is?”

Tommy Doyle: “Your family. They’re buried there. Alongside Laurie Strode’s family.”

-Kara turns to Tommy, then back to the road.

Kara Strode: “And possibly alongside Laurie Strode.”

Tommy Doyle: “Right. Once we’re there, he’ll have to believe us.”

Kara Strode: “Well, the first half of it. It won’t prove the rest of it.”

Tommy Doyle: “Maybe not. But it is a starting point.”

-Kara turns to Tommy, then back to the road. She looks on for a moment. And then, she shrugs.

Kara Strode: “Wait a minute! If Laurie Strode was buried there, then why didn’t John find out about us? How did he miss my parents’ and brother’s graves and not wonder who they were?”

Tommy Doyle: “You heard what he said. After the funeral, he left and never looked back. He could have been too overwhelmed to look around.”

Kara Strode: “I guess so.”

Tommy Doyle: “Stop worrying about it. For the first time, stop thinking like a psychologist and start thinking like John’s cousin.”

Kara Strode: “I guess I am thinking too much about it.”

-Kara looks on for a moment, then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “When we get there, do you really plan on seeing your old house?”

Tommy Doyle: “Not the boarding house with Mrs. Blankenship if that’s what you’re thinking. The house where I grew up. The house where I saw first him.”

Kara Strode: “Why?”

Tommy Doyle: “For nostalgia’s sake I suppose. After what happened, my family moved out of that house and into another house in the neighborhood. After high school, my parents finally decided to move away and Mrs. Blankenship took me in. You know the rest. And by 1995, no one had moved into my old house.”

Kara Strode: “So?”

Tommy Doyle: “So, if it’s still empty, we could use it to set a trap.”

Kara Strode: “A trap?”

Tommy Doyle: “For Michael.”

Kara Strode: “Are you sure?”

Tommy Doyle: “No. I don’t know for sure yet. But I’m thinking ahead and trying to figure something out. Isn’t that what I’m supposed to be doing?”

Kara Strode: “Right. I’m sorry. This is just overwhelming.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know. I know it is.”

-Tommy looks on at Kara. Kara looks on at him, then turns her attention back to the road. Tommy then looks back towards John’s sports car. In the sports car, Danny turns to John.

Danny Strode: “You’re twenty-four now, right?”

John Strode: “Yeah, that’s right.”

Danny Strode: “What do you do?”

John Strode: “For a living? Believe it or not, I have an ordinary office job. It pays well, but every day is the same.”

Danny Strode: “Oh, so do you work in a cubical and feel like a mouse trapped in a maze?”

-John shrugs.

John Strode: “I used to. After two years, they were so impressed by my job performance, that they moved me into an office of my own. I’m working my way up.”

Danny Strode: “That’s cool. What do you actually do?”

John Strode: “Well, I arrive in the morning, they dump a stack of reports the size of three telephone books on my desk, and I read over each and every one of them. And on top of that, I’m responsible for high profile reports on important clients. From day to day, I present an oral report before a board of directors. And so far, I’ve never disappointed them.”

Danny Strode: “Wow. Sounds a lot like school. Only you’re paid to go.”

-John laughs.

John Strode: “You’re right, I am basically being paid to go to school. It pays for this car. And it pays for a nice house.”

Deleted content: Along the way to Haddonfield, they stop at the neighboring town of Langdon, where Marion Witherton lived and took care of Dr. Loomis before he died. Kara and Tommy think it is a good idea for John to see Dr. Loomis’ grave. While there, we learn that both John and Tommy have read Dr. Loomis’ published memoir, something that was referred to in H6. We also see an important flashback that explains Loomis’ fate.

Deleted content: In the aftermath Halloween 1995, Dr. Wynn tried to pass on his role as Michael’s guardian and leader of the cult onto Dr. Loomis. Unfortunately for Wynn, Loomis was too old, too ill and too weak. Upon seeing the Thorn tattoo appearing on his wrist, Loomis suffers another stroke. It is too much for him to handle. Remember, he previously suffered a stroke in the aftermath of Halloween 1989. Anyway, it turns out Wynn was foolish enough to overlook his own daughter and choose Loomis as his successor instead. He disobeyed the order of the Runes and will be stuck watching over Michael until the next Halloween.

Deleted content: In the meantime, Loomis is left in the care of Marion Witherton. She presumably took care of him when he suffered his first stroke. Loomis is not in a position to warn Marion or anybody about how dangerous Wynn is. Wynn visits Loomis and tells him that there is nothing he can do, because they are already in the process of covering up what happened that Halloween, as well as what happened on the two prior Halloweens in 1988 and `89. Realizing that he must protect those that are left over in Michael’s bloodline, Loomis orders Marion to get rid of all his research concerning those three Halloweens. This includes any chapters in his memoir concerning those Halloweens as well. By December 1995, Dr. Loomis dies and is finally able to rest in peace.

Deleted content: On the rest of the way to Haddonfield, Danny rides with Kara and Tommy rides with John. Notably, Tommy doesn’t completely trust “John” yet for who he is. He wasn’t comfortable with Danny riding with John in the first place, and he wants to make sure he learns more about him before they get to Haddonfield.

-As John drives away from the cemetery, Tommy looks around the interior of his sports car.

Tommy Doyle: “Nice ride.”

John Strode: “Thanks.”

-Tommy turns to John, then to the road ahead. He turns back to John and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “So, what do you do? How do you pay for this?”

John Strode: “I work and slave at an office.”

Tommy Doyle: “You don’t say?”

John Strode: “Yeah. What do you do?”

Tommy Doyle: “I work at a bookstore.”

John Strode: “Oh.”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s the not a terribly interesting job, but even on a slow day, I got something to pass the time. Something to read.”

John Strode: “So do I. There’s always report to read over. And if there isn’t, there’s guaranteed to be one soon enough.”

-Tommy turns to John for a moment. John continues paying attention to the road. Tommy looks on ahead and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “You’re a young guy. You have your whole life ahead of yourself. I don’t know you that well yet, but for some reason, I have a hard time picturing you working at an office.”

-John turns to Tommy questionably, then back to road.

John Strode: “So do I sometimes. After my mother was put away, I realized there was nothing I could do. It was an impossible situation. So, I went off to college and buried myself into classes. In my third year, I heard what happened to her.”

-John looks on ahead, then over to Tommy.

John Strode: “If you ask me, it was not an inmate who murdered her. It was Michael. There’s no proof, but I know it was him.”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m more than willing to believe that.”

-John looks back ahead and continues.

John Strode: “That didn’t make things easier for me. If anything, it gave me more reason to bury myself further into my classes. And then, in my last year, I heard what happened in Haddonfield. At that goddamn house. It wasn’t anybody I knew, but it was still unsettling. When will it end? You know?”

Tommy Doyle: “I do. I really do. When will it end? I wish it would finally.”

John Strode: “Once I finished college, I could have done anything I wanted. By not thinking about the past and focusing my attention on anything else, like papers, I turned out to be a sharp thinker. And, creative and imaginative when asked.”

-John turns to Tommy and points out his car.

John Strode: “It’s not about the money. I settled for the first offer thrown at me and I ran with it. As it turns out, I’m good at burying myself into all the paperwork they throw at me. They can’t keep up. And it also happens to pay well. But in the last year, I have gradually realized that it isn’t enough. Sooner or later, I will have to come to terms…with reality and of all of this. That’s why I agreed to go on this trip.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, I’m glad you’re going. Maybe a trip to Haddonfield is what you need.”

John Strode: “Maybe it is.”

Tommy Doyle: “What do you see yourself doing afterwards?”

John Strode: “After the trip?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah. If you finally come to terms with your past, do you see yourself stepping up and making a living with something you have a genuine interest in?”

John Strode: “It’s a nice thought. If I don’t, the job might end up burying me.”

TO BE CONTINUED TOMORROW...
Reply With Quote
  #5  
Old 05-19-2012, 11:17 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 4

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to Haddonfield later on in the mid-afternoon. Cut to the neighborhood. A truck pulls up to the Doyle house and into the driveway. It parks and the driver’s side door opens. Benny Granger steps out. He looks up at the house and the garage that is separated from it. He sighs.

Benny Granger: “Lindsey…”

-Benny knows what the holiday of Halloween truly means to her. Today, or the day after, could not be better timing to face her and work things out. Especially with her renovating the Doyle house. Not only should he confront her over their differences, he should offer her his hand in repairing the house.

Benny Granger: “Why this house? Why now?”

-Benny continues facing the Doyle house. Alas, today is not the day. Maybe tomorrow. He steps back over to the open door of his truck and climbs into it. He shuts the door (Slam!) and pulls the truck out of the driveway. He pulls the truck back onto the street and drives off.

Deleted content: Once Kara, Danny, John and Tommy arrive in Haddonfield, they get two rooms at a motel. One for Kara and Tommy, and one for Danny and John. By now, Tommy trusts John and admits to Kara that he didn’t trust him before. Kara appreciates his honesty. Tommy also understands how Kara felt earlier and can now see how difficult it will be to tell John the ugly truth.
Deleted content: From there, they visit Tommy’s old house. Tommy is surprised to see his old house being renovated, and he is also surprised to see the old Wallace house completely renovated as well. Upon a closer inspection of the Doyle house, Lindsey catches them outside and is surprised to see Tommy. She is especially surprised to see Kara and Danny back after ten years. And she is very surprised to find out that Laurie Strode also had a son outside of Haddonfield.

Deleted content: Tommy suggests to Kara that she and Danny take John to the cemetery to see proof of her family. And Tommy hangs around to help Lindsey with his old house and catch up.

-Cut to the Doyle house. Lindsey leads Tommy through the gate between the house and garage. She momentarily opens the back door to the house and Tommy walks right into the kitchen. Up ahead is an entrance leading into the dining room.

Tommy Doyle: “Wow. I don’t remember the kitchen that well, but I can already tell it’s different.”

-Lindsey shuts the door behind her.

Lindsey Wallace: “I always felt the kitchen was a bit small…”

Tommy Doyle: “So did I…”

Lindsey Wallace: “….I looked at the plans, and I realized it was the den. The wall between the den and kitchen is really thick. So, I knocked a bit of that down, and voila…”

-Tommy steps out of the kitchen and wanders into the dining room.

Lindsey Wallace: “…And the dining room. If you ask me, it was never as big as a dining room should be. Not like your traditional dining room. The first thing that occurred to me was that it shouldn’t be used as a dining room at all…”

-Tommy steps out of the side entrance of the dining room and wanders into the living room.

Lindsey Wallace: “…And then, I realized what the problem was. The size of the living room! It’s so much bigger than your traditional living room! There’s nothing much I can do about that, but that’s what it is.”

Tommy Doyle: “Now that you mention it, I do recall eating in the dining room more often than in the kitchen. And even in here.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah. So…what’s it like being in your old house again?”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s weird. And it’s different…and you’re different.”

Lindsey Wallace: “So are you…since the last time seeing you.”

-Tommy looks around the living room and over to the entrance to den in the back. He then turns to Lindsey.

Tommy Doyle: “Tell me something. What do you do for a living?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I sell houses. Just like Mr. Strode.”

Tommy Doyle: “I remember you going into that. Yeah. But are you sure you’re not building them, too?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I know. Here I am repairing your old house. It’s something I’m doing on the side. No offense, but I got sick of looking at it. I want to sell it one day. To a family.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s nice. And don’t worry, none taken.”

Lindsey Wallace: “What about you? What are doing here? Where have you been?”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, do you remember what happened here ten years ago?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah, I do. Mr. Strode’s brother moved his family into the old Myers house. And Halloween happened…again.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, it did.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Is that her? And her son? Is that the family that moved in?”

Tommy Doyle: “What’s left of it.”

Lindsey Wallace: “What are they doing back? And what are you doing with them?”

-Tommy turns to Lindsey for a moment, then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Believe it or not, ten years ago, I saw Michael Myers again. I knew that Kara and her family were in danger. I tried to warn them. And I was able to save Kara and her son. Since then, we’ve been away in witness protection.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes.”

Lindsey Wallace: “And what about John?”

Tommy Doyle: “Did you hear what happened to Laurie Strode in 1998? And in 2001?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh, gosh. Yes.”

Tommy Doyle: “He’s all that’s left of her side of the family. Kara contacted him, and John contacted her. And here we are.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I can’t believe it.”

Tommy Doyle: “Whatever you do, please don’t make a big deal about this. We don’t want to stir up the town.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I understand. I won’t tell anyone.”

Tommy Doyle: “Thanks.”

Deleted content: While at the cemetery, Kara fails to find the graves belonging to her mother, father and brother, as well as those belonging to Jamie Lloyd and Jimmy Lloyd. She goes to the mortuary and asks the caretaker if their graves have been moved. According to him, he never saw their graves and never saw their names in the directory. He also seems to know nothing about what happened in Haddonfield on Halloween from 1988 to 1995.

Deleted content: For Kara, this is the first time she finds herself truly frightened about their situation. Although he claims he’s only been serving as caretaker for the last seven years, she’s convinced that he is a Druid member. And he seems convinced that she is a lunatic. If the cult can desecrate the graves and existence of her deceased family, they can do anything they want to get rid of her and what’s left of her family. And if that’s not bad enough, she has no way to prove their story to John. She, along with Danny and John, immediately leave the cemetery to pick up Tommy from the Doyle house.

-Cut back to the Doyle house later on in the late afternoon. Tommy is helping Lindsey work on the living room of the house.

Tommy Doyle: “…So, I noticed your old house across the street.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Did you?”

Tommy Doyle: “It looks really nice. Did you renovate that, too?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I sure did.”

Tommy Doyle: “And I bet you sold it to a family.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Not yet.”

Tommy Doyle: “No?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Well, I don’t have a family yet.”

Tommy Doyle: “Oh…so, you moved back in?”

Lindsey Wallace: “After working on it, yeah. Well, it’s a long story. But after I repaired it, I fell back in love with it again. The murders that took place inside don’t bother me. I don’t believe in that kind of thing. So, I moved out of my parents’ house, sold it, and moved back home.”

Tommy Doyle: “And they say you can’t go back home again…”

Lindsey Wallace: “I know…”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, good for you.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Thank you.”

Tommy Doyle: “So, how long have you been living there?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Five years. The timing seemed right to do it. It was just one year since learning about what happened in California. And it sparked something in me. It got me interested in looking at our town’s past and fixing it. Now that the bastard was finally out of our town, it just seemed right. And I got it started in `99. And then, in 2001, we heard what happened to Laurie. Everyone heard.”

Tommy Doyle: “Same here.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Right. We didn’t know what happened to her for sure. But in the back of our minds…we were hopefully thinking that he was still away from Haddonfield. God bless her soul.”

Tommy Doyle: “I can understand.”

Lindsey Wallace: “And God, you must know what happened a year after that.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah…”

Lindsey Wallace: “At the time, I was interested in renovating your house next. But I decided to put it on hold.”
T
ommy Doyle: “I don’t blame you. So, why did you decide to finally do that now?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Fear. Whether he’s still here or not, I had to get over that feeling and move on. Besides, it’s not like I was planning on renovating the Myers house. He can keep it.”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s his house to keep and hopefully die in. How long can he keep preying on this town?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Exactly. Which kind of brings me to the Strodes. What are they really doing back here? Aren’t they afraid?”

Tommy Doyle: “They are. They’re back for the same reason you’re renovating my house. To cope with their past. To cope with Haddonfield’s past. To cope with the tragedy in their lives. And also to cope with the new direction of their lives. Take it from me, living in protection isn’t easy. Not with our identities stripped away. And not with big brother watching over our shoulders.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I guess not. Don’t worry. I’ll definitely not tell anybody they’re here.”

Tommy Doyle: “The less said, the better.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Hey, listen, why don’t you and the Strodes’ have dinner at my house tonight?”

Tommy Doyle: “Really?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah. I would love for you to come.”

Tommy Doyle: “As long as it doesn’t interfere with this.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Don’t worry. I’m finishing up for the day anyway. I can have something ready by 6:30.”

Tommy Doyle: “Sure. That couldn’t be more perfect. I’m sure the others will be glad to come over.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Great.”

Deleted content: After picking up Tommy from the Doyle house, they go back to the motel and Kara tells Tommy about the desecration of her family’s graves. She asks Tommy if he believes the Druid cult is truly responsible for the cover-up. He believes they are. Before they can make anymore sense of the situation, John shows up at their room and demands to know what’s really going on. They realize that it is time to tell him the ugly truth.

-Cut to John confronting Kara and Tommy inside their motel room.

John Strode: “Listen, I’ve given you more than a fair chance so far. I’ve travelled all the way from home to Missouri to here. And I don’t know what to believe. Other than an alleged cover-up, you haven’t offered me any solid proof to believe all of this…”

-John turns to Kara.

John Strode: “…You claim that you were cousins with my mother. You claim that you and your family lived here ten years ago. You claim that your family was murdered by my uncle. And you also claimed at the cemetery that they were buried here. There’s nothing there…”

-John turns back to Tommy.

John Strode: “…So, what are you going to tell me next? That it too is part of the cover-up?”

-Kara and Tommy turn to each other and sigh. They turn back to John and begin speaking up.

Tommy Doyle: “We wanted to break it to you sooner, but we knew you would have a hard time believing us.”

Kara Strode: “I didn’t like having to lie to you back at Missouri.”

John Strode: “So, what’s that supposed to mean? That all of this is a ruse? That everything you’ve said to me is a lie?”

Kara Strode: “No, it’s all true. We just haven’t told the rest of it yet.”

John Strode: “Well, I came all this way. Tell me the rest of it already. I want to hear it.”

-Kara and Tommy turn to each other. Kara then turns to John.

Kara Strode: “You should sit down for this.”

John Strode: “Okay.”

-John sits down in the chair at the corner. Kara and Tommy sit down on the bed. John faces them from the chair. Kara and Tommy turn to each other, then over to John. Tommy begins speaking up.

Tommy Doyle: “To start off, I have some serious questions for you. Okay?”

John Strode: “Okay.”

Tommy Doyle: “Have you ever asked yourself how Michael was able to track you and your mother down in 1998?”

John Strode: “I can’t say I have. It’s not something I want to think about.”

Tommy Doyle: “I can understand. It’s a disturbing thought. And if you really believe that Michael is responsible for murdering your mother…have you ever asked yourself how he was able to track her down again in 2001?”

John Strode: “No. I haven’t.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, whether he came back twenty years later, or ten years later, you must know what happened to him in 1978.”

John Strode: “Yeah, I do. He was nearly burned alive. My mother told me she saw him burn.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, he did. So, have you ever asked yourself how a man could come back from something like that?”

John Strode: “Since 1998, I have. Somehow, I saw him with my own eyes. She wasn’t being paranoid for nothing.”

Tommy Doyle: “No, she wasn’t.”

John Strode: “What does all of this have to do with you?”

Tommy Doyle: “It has everything to do with us. Because we’re all connected. Tell me, John. How are old are you?”

John Strode: “Twenty-four.”

Tommy Doyle: “So, that makes you born in 1981.”

John Strode: “Yeah. In August. What does that have to do with anything?”

Tommy Doyle: “Just hear us out. Before we tell you anything, we want to confirm your story first. So far, it checks out.”

John Strode: “All right. Then, if you have no more questions for me, tell me your story already.”

Tommy Doyle: “We will…”

-Tommy turns to Kara, then back to John.

Tommy Doyle: “…Just keep in mind those three questions I asked you. They’re important.”

-Tommy turns his attention back to Kara. She turns to him, then over to John. She begins speaking up.

Kara Strode: “My family moved here to Haddonfield in 1995. There was a reason Michael went after us. However, we weren’t here in `88 or `89. And Michael never strikes for no reason. He has always tried to kill his family. He went after your would-be Aunt in 1963. He went after your mom in 1978. He went after both of you in 1998. He may have went after your mom again 2001. And he went after my family in 1995. What you don’t know yet is who he went after in 1988 and `89.”

John Strode: “So, who was it?”

-Kara turns to Tommy, then back to John. John looks on. And she finally speaks up.

Kara Strode: “Your sister.”

John Strode: “My sister?”

Kara Strode: “I’m going to tell you a family secret. After what happened in 1978, your mom was a mess. In the aftermath of that Halloween, she met Jimmy Lloyd. He also experienced that Halloween and lived to tell about it. Your mom was vulnerable, and he sympathized with her. After she graduated from high school the following year, she and Jimmy got married. And the year after that, they had a daughter. They named her Jamie.”

John Strode: “I don’t know how to believe this…”

Kara Strode: “Just listen. We were happy for her. She married young, but she was recovering from her experience. We couldn’t ask for more. Shortly after having Jamie, she had an affair with another man. Presumably your father. And their marriage fell apart. As it turned out, she wasn’t really getting better. Having a family wasn’t enough. Jimmy ran out of patience with her paranoia. And when he wasn’t there for her, another man was. As she had become more paranoid and distant, she split up with Jimmy. And she left Jamie with him. She left Haddonfield and supposedly got remarried. We never saw her again.”

John Strode: “This is too good to be true…”
Kara Strode: “I know it is. Imagine how I felt when I found out about you.”

John Strode: “So, she already had a family. But then, she goes ahead and has an affair with my father?”

Kara Strode: “It makes sense. She most likely wanted to stay quiet about it and leave Haddonfield before anyone found out about you.”

John Strode: “That is a lot to swallow…”

Kara Strode: “I know it is…”

-John sits there in the chair, taking it all in. Kara gives him a moment, then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “There’s more. She came back.”

John Strode: “What do you mean she came back?”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #6  
Old 05-19-2012, 11:30 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 5

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Kara Strode: “My family cared about Jamie. Jimmy knew that and he stayed in touch with us. And according to Jimmy, she kept coming back to Haddonfield after every following Halloween. She missed Jamie terribly. At first, Jimmy thought it was good for Jamie to see a little bit of her mother. But over time, he felt it wasn’t fair to her. If Laurie wasn’t going to be in it for the long haul, she should stay away. The last time she came back was in 1987. And while here, she was in a car accident with Jimmy. Both of them were reported dead. But apparently, your mother survived. And was put into witness protection.”

John Strode: “Wow…I don’t want to believe that, but it does make sense. I can’t believe she never told me. But I guess she had her reasons why…so, what happened to Jamie?”

Kara Strode: “Just like your mother, she was put into the care of an adoptive family. My family wanted to take her in, but it was out of our hands. They chose to protect her by keeping her in Haddonfield and putting her in the care of another family instead. My family was heartbroken. And the following year…he came back. It didn’t matter who was taking care of her. He had no trouble finding her. A lot of people were killed…but she survived. And just like the Halloween before that, Dr. Loomis knew Michael would return home. Loomis did everything he could to save her…just like he tried to save your mom.”

John Strode: “And in 1989?...”

Kara Strode: “Yes. He came back the following year. And so did Loomis. A lot more people died. And this time, Jamie wasn’t so lucky.”

John Strode: “Oh my gosh. Did he kill her?”

Kara Strode: “Actually, it was thought that she and Michael both perished in a fire at the police station. They wanted to believe that Michael was gone. And to keep him from coming back, the celebration of Halloween was banned in Haddonfield. For six years.”

John Strode: “It was? How can they do that?”

Kara Strode: “They did. But they couldn’t keep Halloween out of Haddonfield forever. Jamie came back. And so did Michael.”

John Strode: “What happened to her? Where was she?”

-Kara looks on at John, then turns to Tommy. How are they going to tell him? Tommy turns to John and continues where Kara left off.

Tommy Doyle: “She was in hiding. And where ever Michael was, he knew how to find her. I’m sorry. She didn’t live to see past that Halloween.”

John Strode: “I can’t believe it…”

Kara Strode: “Do you remember how your mom reacted after every Halloween those years?”

John Strode: “I’m thinking about that right now. I can’t quite remember how she was in the late `80’s and early `90’s. I do remember my father leaving her in `92. I remember 1995 more clearly. She became more erratic that year, and it didn’t get any better after that.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, you’re just about caught up. You’re taking this extremely well.”

John Strode: “What you have to say does explain a lot of things. But it doesn’t explain the cover-up.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know it doesn’t.”

John Strode: “Now that you’ve filled in those holes for me, maybe you can explain the cover-up as well. Is there anything you’re still leaving out?”

-Kara and Tommy turn away from John and to each other. They turn back to John, then back to each other again. They speak silently speak amongst themselves for a moment. Finally, they turn back to John and speak up.

Tommy Doyle: “I think you’re ready to know the rest.”

Kara Strode: “Please keep an open mind.”

Tommy Doyle: “Remember those three questions I asked you?...”

Deleted content: I naturally stop there and next show John walking out on them. We, as an audience, already know the dark details, so there is no need to repeat them more than necessary in this story. So, John doesn’t believe them and he walks out. He’s convinced Kara and Danny are fanatics, and he believes that Tommy may be for real and has become screwed up in the head. He goes to the cemetery where he faces his mother for the second time that day. And this time, he opens up. He is actually grateful that “fanatics” led him on and made a fool out of him. He needed something to get him away from where he was and help him let go. And for the first time in four years, he mourns for his mother and feels ready to move on with his life. He later goes to the local bar for a drink.

Deleted content: Meanwhile, Tommy tries to console Kara over her own cousin refusing to believe who she is. He tells her that Lindsey will more likely believe them, and they eventually go to Lindsey’s house for dinner.

-Cut back to the Wallace house later on in the early evening. In the kitchen are Kara, Danny, Tommy and Lindsey having dinner.

Kara Strode: “…So, Tommy tells me that you became a realtor. Just like my uncle.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yep. Just like Mr. Strode. “

Tommy Strode: “It’s funny how that turned out. I used to walk with Laurie on my way to school, and she would stop at houses along the way to drop off their keys for him. You’d think I would have followed in his footsteps instead.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah, that is funny. But, you had such an active imagination. I couldn’t see you doing that. You would tear down every unowned house instead pretending to be Godzilla!”

-Everyone, including Tommy, laughs.

Tommy Doyle: “I would, wouldn’t I? Heh, heh, heh…”

Lindsey Wallace: “Well, what do you do now?”

Tommy Doyle: “I work at a book store. For most people, it’s not the most exciting job. But I like it. It keeps my mind active, especially on a slow day.”

Lindsey Wallace: “It must. You can almost call it a dying art, what with the Internet nowadays.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s true. The day will come when they’ll stop chopping down trees to make more books. They’ll have to at some point. We have to appreciate the books we still have before technology completely takes over.”

Danny Strode: “I’m looking forward to that day. If I could do everything over a computer instead of sitting in a classroom with books, that would be a blast.”

-Lindsey turns to Danny and shrugs.

Lindsey Wallace: “Hate to break it you, buster, but it will be just as ‘boring’ as school…”

Danny Strode: “Sure…”

-Lindsey then turns to Kara.

Lindsey Wallace: “What about you? What do you do?”

Kara Strode: “I’m a psychologist. I run my own private practice.”

Lindsey Wallace: “You don’t say? I must imagine Tommy and his fantasy life visiting your office every other day.”

Kara Strode: “Which one? Him or his fantasy life?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Both. On every other day.”

-Kara, finding herself warming up to Lindsey, has a little laugh with her. Tommy shrugs. He’s been the butt of almost all the jokes that evening. Upon seeing Lindsey warming up to all of them, he gets a good feeling. Now, he’s sure he can get through to Lindsey. Lindsey finishes laughing with Kara and speaks up.

Lindsey Wallace: “I guess this a good time to break the ice. I remember the day I heard that Mr. Strode finally sold the old Myers house. I never thought he would. Then, I found out that it was his brother and his family moving in. And then…Halloween. I’m so sorry about what happened to them.”

Kara Strode: “It’s okay. Thank you for acknowledging. To know that at least one person in this town remembers what happened and knows the truth is comforting. It’s not fun being locked away in witness protection and forced to lie about who you are.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I can imagine.”

Kara Strode: “How well did you know my uncle?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Pretty well. He taught me the tools of the trade.”

Kara Strode: “Then, I think it’s safe to tell you how we wound up moving into that house.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh, you don’t have to.”

Kara Strode: “It’s all right. I want to. You must know that my uncle was a nice man. Very generous.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh, I do.”

Kara Strode: “When we moved in, I had no idea who the house formerly belonged to. Almost my whole family didn’t. But my father, Mr. Strode’s brother, did. He knew the history inside it and didn’t think twice. He did it as a favor to his brother and the thought never occurred to him that he was putting us in danger.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh. I didn’t know that. Again, I’m sorry.”

-Kara, who couldn’t be happier to be remembered in Haddonfield, shrugs.

Kara Strode: “Thank you. I mean that. Thank for you acknowledging. And I’m going to tell you one more thing. Mr. Strode’s brother, my father, wasn’t a nice man at all. He was mean, inconsiderate, and he only thought about himself. When I had Danny…”

-Danny shrugs. And they told him to be on his best behavior! Tommy, upon seeing Kara getting carried away, casually speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “I think she gets the point…”

Kara Strode: “…What?...”

-Kara turns to Tommy questionably. She then settles down and turns back to Lindsey.

Kara Strode: “I’m sorry about that. Returning here has just been overwhelming.”

Lindsey Wallace: “It’s all right. There’s nothing to be sorry about. I understand how you must feel…”

-Lindsey leans over to Kara and silently speaks up.

Lindsey Wallace: “…For the record, Mr. Strode spoke about his brother. I know he was an asshole, too.”

Kara Strode: “Yeah.”

-Danny overhears them and shrugs.

Danny Strode: “He was an asshole.”

Kara Strode: “Danny!”

Tommy Doyle: “Danny…”

Danny Strode: “What? Even I remember him being mean! And I was a kid.”

-Kara turns to Danny in a stern manner for a moment. She then can’t help but laugh. Danny, who knows this as well as she did, is right. The rest of them join in and share the laugh. It’s true, Mr. Strode’s brother was an asshole!

-Cut to the local bar later on in the evening. Sitting a table are five local rednecks. Two of them are Drew Mackenzie and Benny Granger. The others are Russ Mayer, Gary Stamos and Milo Thatcher, who are in their thirties and forties.

Drew Mackenzie: “So, Benny, when are you going to talk to Lindsey?”

Benny Granger: “Hey, we just sat down. I’m not ready to talk about Lindsey yet.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Of course not. Not until you’re plastered.”

-Russ, Gary and Milo laugh.

Russ, Gary and Milo: “Ha, ha, ha, ha, ha, ha, ha, ha…”

Benny Granger: “Ha, ha. Look, I just got off work…”

Drew Mackenzie: “And we just got off dinner. With our families. When are you going to commit to Lindsey and start your own?”

Benny Granger: “What is all this? You haven’t even had a sip of your drink yet, and I’m already seeing you speaking another language!”

Drew Mackenzie: “Listen, I’m only saying this now, because it’s Halloween. I know what Halloween means to her. Even though she’ll never admit it. Why else is she working on the Doyle house?”

Benny Granger: “How should I know?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Maybe you should ask her and find out.”

Benny Granger: “All right, first of all, Halloween doesn’t mean anything to Lindsey. She’s over it. She’s been over it for years. And second of all, maybe she’s working on that house, so that she has something nicer to look at when she steps outside her door. As long as that house remains in the past, this town will never move on. Did you ever think of that?”

Drew Mackenzie: “Oh, I have. I’ve been thinking about that all afternoon since Lindsey told me the exact same thing this morning.”

Russ Mayer: “Really?”

Gary Stamos: “You know what they say. Great minds think alike.”

Milo Thatcher: “And here, we’ve been teasing Benny all these years about not having one.”

-Benny turns to others, then back to Drew.

Benny Granger: “Okay, so I know her well. I’ve been involved with her for six years.”

Russ Mayer: “On and off.”

Gary Stamos: “More often off.”

Milo Thatcher: “It’s hard to say if you’ve ever really been ‘on,’ what with his that ‘great’ mind of yours.”

-Benny shrugs.

Benny Granger: “Will you guys cut that out already?”

Drew Mackenzie: “You know what I think? You’re right. She’s not really making a statement to everyone in town. Rather, she is making a statement to you. Six years ago, she wanted to fix up her old house and you offered to help her.”

Benny Granger: “So?”

Drew Mackenzie: “So, this is the sign. If you don’t help her fix up the Doyle house, you might not get another chance to fix the relationship.”

Benny Granger: “You’re just messing with my head, so I’ll go to her. For your information, I happen to remember her wanting to renovate that house three years ago.”

Drew Mackenzie: “And what stopped her?”

Benny Granger: “What do you think? The same thing that stopped and stunned all of us that year. Halloween.”

Drew Mackenzie: “So, why is she finally catching up to those plans now?”

Benny Granger: “You know what I think why? Because she’s ready to forget about it and move on. I say, good for her.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Then, why don’t you say that to her face?”

Benny Granger: “I don’t need to. She most likely knows how I feel.”

-Drew looks on at Benny for a moment, then goes on.

Drew Mackenzie: “All the more reason to…”

-Benny sighs of frustration.

Benny Granger: “Okay, will you leave me alone about this? Please!”

Drew Mackenzie: “Fine. Just consider this a warning. I know Lindsey well, too. She isn’t going to wait forever…”

Benny Granger: “Sure. Whatever you say…”

Drew Mackenzie: “…And one more thing. Whatever you do, you better not break her heart.”

Benny Granger: “Are you kidding, man? You, too?”

Drew Mackenzie: “A long time ago, when you talked about how much liked her, we all supported you. And we also laughed…”

Benny Granger: “You guys sure did…”

Drew Mackenzie: “…And when you jumped at the chance to help her renovate her old house, we still laughed. What were the odds of her seeing something in you? Well, we’re not laughing at you anymore. At least I’m not. I believe in you.”

Russ Mayer: “So do I.”

Gary Stamos: “What he said.”

Milo Thatcher: “Same here.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I know you’re serious about her. And I know she’s serious about you. You have to stop feeling like she’s too good for you and, like the rest us, move on.”

-Benny turns to Drew, then to the others. He turns to Drew and sighs.

Benny Granger: “I guess you’re right.”

Drew Mackenzie: “What are you really afraid of? Marrying her? Committing to her? Do you feel like she’s more successful than you are? What is it?”

-Benny turns to Drew, then to the others. He turns to all of them and goes on.

Benny Granger “It’s not about how successful each of us are. For what it’s worth, she is more successful I am. And that doesn’t bother me. I’m glad for her. And I want to commit to her. I really do. The problem is that I’m a screw-up. I’m good at my job. But as long as I’m not working with tools, I’m always making a complete fool of myself. Often without realizing it. And often embarrassing others. It’s the story of my life. The only kid who got picked on more than me in school was Tommy Doyle. You guys are right to laugh at me here every night and laugh at me even more behind my back. I lack common sense. And it’s true. Lindsey is too good for me. She deserves someone a lot better than me.”

-The others look on at Benny, then to turn to each other. They turn back to Benny and Drew speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s true. We do laugh at your expense. But we’re only laughing with you. We know that you’re a good guy. Lindsey knows that too. The whole town knows. No one cares about your faults. We all have faults. And for that matter, we never talk about you behind your back when you’re not here or are completely plastered.”

Benny Granger: “Sure you guys don’t.”

-Drew looks on at Benny, then to others. The others speak up.

Russ Mayer: “We say a lot of things. About you and about ourselves. But at the end of the day, we don’t mean any of it. A lot of the time, we’re too damn drunk to remember any of it.”

Gary Stamos: “We stop here for drinks to relax and get things off our minds. We’re not out to make a fool out of you.”

Milo Thatcher: “We’re all screw-ups. Especially me. That’s why I often direct the attention off myself and towards you.”

Russ Mayer: “In the end, we’re a bunch of rednecks. No one says it to our faces, but that’s what we are.”

Gary Stamos: “Of course no one ever says it to our faces. If they did, they wouldn’t have a face left.”

Milo Thatcher: “Hell, if they said it to my face, they wouldn’t have a face or a skull left over.”

Drew Mackenzie: “You see? We’re really not out to get you. And you’re not that different from the rest of us. We’re just like you. Only you don’t have a woman on your side. Tell me, how did you feel when you were with Lindsey? When things were going well?”

Benny Granger: “It felt great. I felt like a million bucks.”

Drew Mackenzie: “So do we. At the end of the day, we’re all screw-ups. Nobody cares. And neither does Lindsey. We’re a small town community. We don’t make an issue of our individual faults. What we do make an issue of is when is when two locals get involved and split up. It’s hard to avoid gossip like that. Do you want others to stop warning you not to break Lindsey’s heart? Because I know it’s not just me. I think you know what you have to do.”

-Benny sighs.

Benny Granger: “I do. I have to get over how inferior I feel to everyone else in town. And especially how inferior I feel to Lindsey. I should go the Doyle house tomorrow and offer to help her.”

-Benny looks on for a moment, then continues.

Benny Granger: “Better yet, I should talk to her tonight.”

Drew Mackenzie: “You should.”

Benny Granger: “After I finally chug down this drink.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #7  
Old 05-19-2012, 11:43 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 6

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Benny shrugs and drinks up. So do the others.

-At another table having drinks are the four young adults. Whitney turns to Charlie.

Whitney Hartley: “…I can’t believe that no one was willing to talk to us. Even when just the two of us tried talking to them. I couldn’t have been any more sympathetic and understanding. And they looked at me as if I was the devil trying to stir things up.”

Charlie Roderick: “Don’t blame yourself. Whatever it was, it wasn’t us. It was them. And they have every right to look the other away. Who knows how many other people have come here before us to truly harass them with the same questions.”

Whitney Hartley: “If that’s true, I can’t help but wonder if we pushed them further into the past today. Maybe we shouldn’t have come here at all.”

Charlie Roderick: “Don’t think like that. We’re not the only people who know. And we’re not the only people who will continue to come here and ask questions. What matters is that we were up front with them in an honest and friendly manner. If that wasn’t enough to get confirmation from them, maybe nothing is. In the end, we still know the truth.”

-Both of them look on and have their drinks. Whitney then turns to David.

Whitney Hartley: “What about you? You’ve been unusually quiet.”

-David turns to Whitney, then begins speaking up.

David Ward: “It was my fault that a lot of people didn’t talk.”

Whitney Hartley: “That’s not true.”

David Ward: “No, it is. You guys are right. I am an ass. A bigger ass than Jesse is.”

-Jesse shrugs.

Jesse Browning: “Whoa, really?”

-David turns to Jesse, then back to others.

David Ward: “I may be more level-headed than he ever is, but I sometimes lack the sensibility to be friendly with people in a natural manner.”

Charlie Roderick: “That may be true, but we still wouldn’t have gotten an answer from them if you were honest in your intentions. Clearly, the people in this town are scared. How can they not be? If Michael hadn’t returned here again three years ago, they might have been willing to talk to us. Unless he is reported in another state again, they’ll continue to say nothing.”

David Ward: “It would still be nice to get just one confirmation from somebody. To officially know that I’m not making it up. And to know that my dad didn’t make up those stories. Even though I know he’s telling the truth.”

Charlie Roderick: “Well, did you see the way people reacted towards us?”
David Ward: “Yeah.”

Charlie Roderick: “I think they’re initial facial reactions told us more than their words did when they told us to go away.”

Whitney Hartley: “You make a point. Judging from a lot of people we talked to today, I think you might be right about that. But what about the cemetery? And the caretaker? I think he honestly believes that nothing happened. How can they not be buried here?”

Charlie Roderick: “There could be a number of reasons why. Maybe the remaining family chose to have them buried elsewhere. And maybe the caretaker is just another person fooled by the cover-up.”

Jesse Browning: “Oh, man, that caretaker! The way he told all of us off totally ruled!...”

-Jesse turns to Whitney, then to the others.

Jesse Browning: “…You know, I don’t think I really believe you guys anymore. Really, nobody here has said anything. Maybe nothing really happened.”

Whitney Hartley: “No. Something did happen here in the late `80’s and mid-`90’s. I remember being fascinated by those stories while growing up. I was fascinated by a lot of crime stories. That’s why I entered law.”

David Ward: “Exactly. Same here. That’s how I feel.”

Charlie Roderick: “Well, maybe knowing is enough. As long as you believe it, it did happen.”

-David and Whitney both look on. So does Charlie. He then speaks up.

Charlie Roderick: “So, what about tomorrow? Should we still hang around for Halloween? Or leave?”

Whitney Hartley: “I wouldn’t mind staying. As long as we don’t harass anymore people.”

David Ward: “And as long as they don’t come after us with torches.”

Charlie Roderick: “I don’t think we have to worry about that. As long as we leave them alone, and be friendly with them if they talk to us, we shouldn’t get on their bad sides.”

-Cut back to Lindsey’s house later on in the evening. Outside, Tommy and Lindsey walk around the backyard.

Lindsey Wallace: “So…are you involved with her?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah, I am…”

-Tommy shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “…Why, are you jealous?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I don’t know. Should I be?”

-They both have a little laugh. Tommy then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “What about you? You’re pretty cute. Are you taken?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I was. I’ve been with a guy for several years. On and off. He’s really nice, but also very insecure.”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m sorry to hear that.”

Lindsey Wallace: “It’s okay. We’ll work it out. We always do.”

-Lindsey then stops. Tommy stops and turns to her questionably. Lindsey turns to him for a moment, then goes on.

Lindsey Wallace: “Listen, I remember how you were doing ten years ago. I know that we grew apart from each other after high school.”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t blame you for seeing less of me. I was a mess.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I already talked to Kara about this, but I still feel compelled to ask you. How are you really doing?”

Tommy Doyle: “Right now? I couldn’t be happier. I have Kara, I have Danny, and I have everything that I didn’t have ten years ago to wake me back up into reality. You’ve seen them for yourself. They aren’t part of my imagination. I love Kara. I look out for Danny. And he looks up to me.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I can see that.”

-Lindsey looks on at Tommy for a moment. Tommy turns to her questionably.

Tommy Doyle: “What is it?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Did you really see him again?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. I told you. You could ask Kara and Danny. We all saw him.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I did ask Kara and she confirmed it. And if that’s true…I want to know what happened.”

Tommy Doyle: “You do?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yes. Everything. I’m curious to know now.”

Tommy Doyle: “Why?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Because I remember the last few things I said to you more than ten years ago. Over your growing obsession with Michael Myers. I’m not proud of what I said.”

Tommy Doyle: “I remember what you said to me. And you were right about everything. I should have listened to you then. I should have grown up. But then, if I didn’t, Kara and Danny might not be alive today.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah…that thought occurred to me, too.”

Tommy Doyle: “Do you really want to know?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yes, I do. I want to hear your side of the story.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, it’s a long story. If you really want to know, and have an open mind, I’m willing to tell you.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I’d like to hear it.”

-Tommy turns to Lindsey for a moment, then goes on.

Tommy Doyle “All right. What if I told you that it was happening again? And what if I told you that it never stopped happening?”

Lindsey Wallace: “After everything that’s happened here, I guess I can believe part of that. But I don’t understand the first part. What are you trying to tell me?”

Tommy Doyle: “What if I also included what happened in 1998 and 2001?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Even what happened to Laurie Strode?”

Tommy Doyle: “Even what happened to her. She has everything to do with Haddonfield’s history as well.”

-Lindsey looks on at Tommy for a moment, then turns away. Unsure of what she’s getting herself into, she turns back to Tommy and bites the bullet.

Lindsey Wallace: “What did happen?”

Tommy Doyle: “I saw Michael. I saw him again and realized that Kara’s family was in danger. And I was able to save Kara and Danny. You know that much already. And that only scratches the surface of what happened. There’s a lot more behind it and everything else that has taken place here. It gets really dark. And weird.”

-Lindsey turns to Tommy for a moment, then speaks up.

Lindsey Wallace: “I’m listening.”

Deleted content: Just as in John’s case, I naturally stop there and next show Lindsey walking back inside her house in disbelief. Not only does she not believe Tommy, she is convinced that he took advantage of Kara and Danny, and manipulated them. Before Lindsey kicks them out of her house, Kara tells her to go to the cemetery and ask the caretaker about her deceased family.

Deleted content: Back at the bar, Benny has too much to drink and is no condition to talk to Lindsey that night. Drew and other guys patronize him a little bit and have a little laugh at his expense. Meanwhile, the four young adults take notice of them. David thinks they might get confirmation about the cover-up if the three of them (minus Jesse) approach the rednecks gently and try going about it the right way.

Deleted content: They introduce themselves and talk to the rednecks about how they’re enjoying their stay in the small town. They tell the truth and talk about how Haddonfield is so much quieter than the big city. And miraculously, they get confirmation. The rednecks warm up to them and don’t deny anything happening on Halloween in the `80’s and `90’s. Unfortunately, Jesse spoils the moment. He has had too much to drink and he blurts out nonsense about Jamie Lloyd and the conspiracy. The rednecks immediately see what is going on and young adults get the hell out of there.

Deleted content: Present at the bar during this big scene is John. At first, he takes the young adults as fanatics who have also read into a so-called conspiracy. But then, he overhears the rednecks and finally gets his own confirmation about his mother’s secret past. Benny, very drunk, asks the other rednecks what just happened and why they won’t tell outsiders the truth anymore. The rednecks humor him and tell him why. More specifically, they tell him how they stopped talking about Halloween after 1995, and how Michael was reported in California three years later. They wanted to believe that by not talking about Halloween anymore, Michael had no reason to stay in Haddonfield.

Deleted content: John goes back to the motel and catches up with Kara, Danny and Tommy. He believes them now. Kara is especially grateful to have her cousin back on board. Tommy tells John that they returned to Haddonfield to stop Michael. John, having had enough of all the bullshit, agrees to help them. Now, their only issue is Lindsey. If she doesn’t come around and start believing them the next day, they won’t have access to Tommy’s old house. They may have to find another location in Haddonfield to plan a trap against Michael.

TO BE CONTINUED TOMORROW...
Reply With Quote
  #8  
Old 05-21-2012, 07:27 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 7

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut back to the motel later on in the late evening. In room ten is Kara getting ready for bed. Also in the same bed and reading the occult book is Tommy. Kara turns to Tommy, then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “Well? Are you going to read that all night?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’m sorry. Should I move over to the other bed, so you can sleep?”

Kara Strode: “You don’t have to. I don’t mind. How much do you plan on reading tonight?”

Tommy Doyle: “Not too much. I’m starting to get an idea.”

Kara Strode: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah, I am.”

Kara Strode: “Can I see?”

Tommy Doyle: “You really want to? This is dark stuff.”

Kara Strode: “I’ve already experienced it firsthand. Reading about it won’t bother me.”

Tommy Doyle: “Okay.”

-Tommy hands Kara the book. As Kara sees the open page, the camera focuses on it: Wunjo – warmth, pleasure, harmony, joy…

Kara Strode: “Wunjo…what is that?”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s the opposite of Thorn.”

Kara Strode: “Right, Thorn…and what exactly is Thorn again?”

Tommy Doyle: “You want to know what Thorn is? It is every bad thought in the back of your mind. It is every impatient thought you have while stuck in traffic. It is every four-letter word. What it basically is, is evil. Thorn stands for the very essence of evil. The opposite of good.”

Kara Strode: “And that’s what Michael has?”

Tommy Doyle: “He was born with it. He was inflicted with it. He began acting on it when he was six years old. And ten years ago, he was supposed to hand it over to Danny.”

Kara Strode: “You don’t have to remind me. I remember it vividly.”

Tommy Doyle: “So does Danny. I can see it in the way he behaves. He needed this trip badly, too. He doesn’t exactly have a lot of friends in school. And he doesn’t try to make friends with other kids either. His experience hasn’t directed him away from the beyond. It has only gotten him more interested in it. He’s turning out more and more like me. And I’m worried about that.”

Kara Strode: “I had no idea.”

Tommy Doyle: “There’s a lot I didn’t tell you while in protection. You know one part of my life. And Lindsey knows the other part. It makes me think. Maybe I should have anticipated her not believing me.”

Kara Strode: “You tried. That’s what matters.”

Tommy Doyle: “I guess so.”

Kara Strode: “So, what about Wunjo?”

Tommy Doyle: “What about it?”

Kara Strode: “You say that it is Thorn’s opposite.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, it is. You see, there are about twenty-five Runes that make up the belief system of the Druids. At one end of the spectrum is Thorn. It is the darkest Rune that exists…”

Kara Strode: “And at the other end must be Wunjo.”

Tommy Doyle: “Exactly. Together, they stand for good and evil. And together, they cancel each other out.”

Kara Strode: “They do?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes.”

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh. You don’t think...”

Tommy Doyle: “The thought did occur to me. I’ve been going over this chapter a couple times to confirm it. Maybe I can use Wunjo to reach out to Michael.”

Kara Strode: “So, what does that mean? That he really isn’t responsible for his actions?”

Tommy Doyle: “You might not want to believe that, but that is what the book has been telling me.”

Kara Strode: “What about Danny?”

Tommy Doyle: “What about him?”

Kara Strode: “If Michael is here, and so is the cult, do you think they have plans for Danny again?”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think so.”

Kara Strode: “How do you know?”

Tommy Doyle: “Because Michael was supposed to pass Thorn on to him ten years ago. But we stopped that from happening. We prevented the first part of the prophecy from coming true. Most importantly, we interfered with Michael’s and Danny’s destinies. If I’m following the book correctly, and I think I am, Danny is no longer inflicted with Thorn. It has been passed over to another child. To another generation.”

Kara Strode: “Another generation? You mean to tell me that they plan on doing this all over again?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. It’s been going on for years. For decades and centuries. Since forever. That’s what I’ve been learning from the book. It only became known to the outside world when the case of Michael Myers became famous…and infamous. I don’t think we’ll ever be able to stop them from what they’re doing. But maybe we can stop them this Halloween and save another child from becoming the next Boogeyman. Maybe we can break their prophecy.”
Kara Strode: “Wow…and what about Stephen Lloyd? Where is he?”

Tommy Doyle: “I guess they’ll let us know when they feel we’re ready.”

Kara Strode: “I guess so…”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s a lot. I know. You want me move over into the other bed, so you can sleep?”

-Kara turns to the Tommy, then to the book.

Kara Strode: “No. I don’t.”

-Kara snuggles up to Tommy to read the occult book with him.

-In room eleven are Danny and John laying on opposite beds.

John Strode: “...If everything Tommy and your mom have told me is supposed to be true, then I don’t know what to say. My experience doesn’t compare to yours.”

-Danny looks up at the ceiling.

Danny Strode: “I know.”

John Strode: “How are you really doing?”

Danny Strode: “I’m okay.”

-John looks over at Danny for a moment, then speaks up.

John Strode: “I don’t think you are. I remember growing up with a paranoid alcoholic for a mother. It wasn’t so easy for me. So, I can only begin to imagine what it’s been like for you.”

-Danny continues looking up at the ceiling. Finally, he looks over to John in the other bed and sighs.

Danny Strode: “When we went into protection, they told me that I was no longer Danny Strode. That I was someone else. And that I couldn’t talk about my experience to anyone. How can they expect me to do that? Before I knew it, they were acting like different people and talking about different things. They transformed into complete strangers.”

John Strode: “It sounds to me like that they forget to tell you one thing. That it was okay for you to talk to them about your experience. To cope with it.”

Danny Strode: “They did tell me that. But when they did, they were no longer Tommy and my mom. They were…Bridget Leighton and Brian Garrison. And I was…Matthew Leighton.”

John Strode: “You didn’t know who you were anymore, did you?”

Danny Strode: “No.”

John Strode: “The transition from one life to another is never easy. They must have slipped into their new identities before you were ready to slip into yours.”

Danny Strode: “Yeah, they did. It was like ‘Invasion of The Body Snatchers’.”

John Strode: “Well, I’ve lived in protection almost my entire life. I was a kid when I was brought into it. And before then, I was too young to remember my first six years as ‘John Strode.’ Or rather, ‘John Sullivan.’ My father’s name. For eighteen years, I was ‘John Tate.’ And it’s only been about a day now that I’ve been getting to know my former identity as ‘John Strode.’ After all the family secrets I’ve learned today, stepping forward as ‘John Strode’ isn’t that easy for me either.”

Danny Strode: “So, how does it feel to know that you had a half-sister?”

John Strode: “You know how it feels? It’s like being in middle of a soap opera. And to think, before she died, she brought a child of her own into the world. In a way, it’s not too late for me to get to know her after all. As it turns out, you and your mother aren’t my only long lost cousins I’ve found out about today. I just hope he’s okay.”

Danny Strode: “Same here.”

-In room twenty-two are two of the young adults. David and Charlie lay back on opposite beds watching TV. Currently playing is “The Thing” from 1982. David turns to Charlie, then back to TV. He turns back to Charlie and almost begins speaking up. He hesitates and turns his attention back to the TV. He lays back for a moment. And then, he goes for it.

David Ward: “I have an idea. And before you shoot it down, think about it first.”

-Charlie rolls his eyes.

Charlie Roderick: “What is it, David?”

David Ward: “Before we leave, let’s go see the Myers house.”

-Charlie turns to David, then looks away. He lays back on his bed for a moment. Finally, he speaks up.

Charlie Roderick: “So, let me get this straight. After nearly being assaulted at the bar, you would rather be assaulted at the Myers house by Michael Myers?”

David Ward: “No. Not exactly. I just want to see it. Up close and personal.”

Charlie Roderick: “But you did see it. We all did. We passed it in the neighborhood.”

David Ward: “I know we did. But I want a closer look. Remember our ghost hunting days? We would check out every haunted house and haunted graveyard we read about.”

Charlie Roderick: “Sure, we did. It was fun, but the Myers house isn’t a haunted house. It’s a death house. After everything you know about it and this town, I thought you would know better.”

David Ward: “I know it’s dangerous, but how often are we in Haddonfield? And how often do we have the opportunity to see that house? If there’s a time to check out that house, it’s now. There won’t be a chance tomorrow. It will probably be under constant watch.”

Charlie Roderick: “Wait, so what do you actually want to do? Walk up to the porch? Or look around inside it?”

David Ward: “Go inside if we can.”

Charlie Roderick: “No. No way, man. You’re nuts.”

David Ward: “Well, come on. Do you really think Michael Myers is still here?”

Charlie Roderick: “Are you seriously asking me that?”

David Ward: “Do you?”

Charlie Roderick: “I don’t know. And I would rather not care to find out.”

David Ward: “Fine. I was just throwing it out there.”

Charlie Roderick: “And I’m throwing it back over.”

-Suddenly, there’s a knock on their door. Charlie gets up from his bed and walks over to the door. He opens it and sees Whitney.

Whitney Hartley: “Hey.”

Charlie Roderick: “Hey.”

-Charlie steps aside and allows Whitney inside. He shuts the door and she speaks up.

Whitney Hartley: “Well, Jesse is finally passed out. Thank God.”

Charlie Roderick: “It’s about time. I can’t believe he hit you.”

Whitney Hartley: “He was drunk.”

Charlie Roderick: “And he’s also an asshole.”

-Whitney sighs.

Whitney Hartley: “Yeah. Yeah, he is. He insisted on coming, because he didn’t trust me going on a trip with two guys. Two guys I’ve been friends with my whole life. And look what happened. He didn’t have to worry about me. We had to worry about him the whole time.”

Charlie Roderick: “Well, the worst is over. In the morning, we’ll get out of here and we won’t have to see any of the people ever again.”

Whitney Hartley: “Right. Look, can I stay in with you guys tonight?”

David Ward: “Sure.”

Charlie Roderick: “Of course.”

-Charlie lays down on his bed. He scoots over and allows Whitney room.

-Cut to Haddonfield later on at midnight. The eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. Cut to town. Cut to the local hardware store. It is closed for the night. Cut to the local diner. It is also closed. Nobody is having midnight snacks. Cut to the local bar. It is also closed. There are no more drinks being served. And cut to the local motel. Still present in the parking lot with the other vehicles is Tommy’s SUV, John’s sports car and the young adults’ conversion van.

-Cut to the neighborhood. Cut to the Doyle house. It remains empty and is resting before the next day of work. Cut to the Wallace house. The lights are off. Lindsey is asleep by now. Cut to the local cemetery. No cars are present in the parking lot. Everyone in town, including the dead, are asleep. Or, are they?

-Cut to the Myers house. It sits there in the darkness of the night, and one can only wonder if it is truly asleep. A mysterious, white cargo van pulls up to it and the eerie “Halloween” theme plays on. However, darker undertones are also heard. This is a darker version of the “Halloween” theme. The van pulls up in front of the house and parks. The passenger side door opens and a Druid member in a robe and hood steps out.

-The Druid member steps onto the curb and starts walking up to the house. Meanwhile, the sliding door opens and another Druid member in a robe and hood steps out. The driver’s side door also opens. Meanwhile, the first druid member steps onto the porch and up to the door. He/she unlocks the front door (Click! Chi-ching!) and opens it all the way.

-The first Druid member walks back over to the van, where the two other members are waiting for him/her. One more Druid member, inside the van, pushes forward a coffin. The Druid members take hold of it and pull it out. The fourth Druid member then steps out of the van and helps the others lift up the coffin.

-As all four Druid members carry the coffin away from the van, it is revealed to be a small coffin. One built for a child. They carry the coffin up to the house. They carry it up into the porch and towards the door. They carry it through the open doorway and into the front entrance. They carry it through the left entrance leading into the living room.

-The Druid members carry the coffin up to a couch in the middle of the living room. They gently set it on the couch. They leave the coffin there and walk back outside. Moments later, they step back into the living room. They place candles all over the living room and begin lighting them.

-They light all the candles and stand before the coffin. They begin praying silently to themselves. As they do, the camera pans over to them. It pans up to one of the Druid members and focuses on the darkness of his/her hood. It pans close up to the Druid member and slowly reveals him to be an African-American male in his fifties. Where have we seen him before? The screen begins fading out.

-The screen fades back in and the dark “Halloween” theme tones down. Ultimately revealed is a suburban neighborhood and a crime scene at a house. The date “October 1998” appears. The words “Langdon, Illinois” appear after. Investigating the crime scene are two deputies. One of them is a familiar African-American in his fifties. The other deputy is younger and Caucasian.

Younger Deputy: “…So, whose house is this anyway?”

Druid Deputy: “Marion Witherton. Dr. Sam Loomis’ nurse. He was that shrink who died a few years ago. He lived here. She took care of him.”

Younger Deputy: “I remember him. I saw a special on ’60 Minutes’ about him. He spent his life tracking down that Halloween guy, who butchered all those kids in Haddonfield, right?”

Druid Deputy: “Michael Myers.”

Younger Deputy: “Right…Hey, you don’t think it’s Michael Myers?”

-The Druid deputy, who knows a lot more than he claims, speaks up in a casual manner.

Druid Deputy: “They never found his body.”

-The other deputy, successfully fooled by the cover-up, naively speaks up.

Younger Deputy: “But that was like twenty years ago...”

-The screen fades out and then fades back in to reveal the African-American Druid member silently praying with the three other members. The dark “Halloween” theme picks up where it left off. The three other members start walking away from the coffin and so does he.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #9  
Old 05-21-2012, 07:32 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 8

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK AND ENJOY.

-All four of them step away from the coffin and back over to the side entrance. As they do, the camera follows them. It follows them back into the front entrance and over to the open doorway. And it stops at the open doorway as they step out onto the porch and shut the door into darkness.

-The camera stays put by the door as it is heard being locked (Click! Chi-ching!). A moment passes and the doors to the van are heard being shut (Slam! Slam! Sla-a-a-a-am!). The van is heard revving up and eventually disappearing. And the dark “Halloween” theme begins toning down.

-The camera begins panning away from the door. It pans around and towards the living room entrance. To the right of the living room entrance, and beyond the front entrance, are the stairs leading to the second floor. And just as the camera begins panning into the living room entrance, a bedroom door on the second floor can be seen opening in the corner of the screen.

-The camera pans past the living entrance and towards the coffin on the couch. As it does, footsteps can be heard. The camera pans closer up to the coffin and the footsteps become louder and more grounded. The camera pans right up to the coffin and stops. It stays put in front of it. As it does, the footsteps become louder and louder. And heavy breathing is heard. One more footstep is heard in front of the coffin and it stops.

-The camera stays put in front of the coffin as before. Heavy breathing continues to be heard. And then, a left hand and arm appears on screen. The hand itself looks scarred, while a blue sleeve is worn over the arm. The hand takes hold of the coffin. It takes hold of the lid and begins opening it.

-As the coffin is slowly opened, the darkness from inside it is welcomed by the darkness in the living room. And as the coffin opens up more and more, the darkness inside the coffin disappears. It is absorbed by the darkness in the living room…and an unconscious child is seen inside the coffin. The child, a boy, is within ten years of age. He is Stephen Lloyd.

-With the lid fully open, the left arm pulls back and disappears off screen. The heavy breathing continues to be heard. For a moment, the heavy breathing remains present. And then, a right arm appears on screen. Worn over the arm is a blue sleeve. And extending beyond the sleeve is a scarred hand. The hand is also grasping a big, sharp kitchen knife. The arm raises the knife over the coffin (Swi-i-i-i-ish). It raises the knife directly over the coffin and swings back off-screen (Swish!). Only the tip of the blade is still visible.

-The arm is about swing forward when a vehicle is heard outside. The knife is pulled back (Swi-i-i-i-ish) and it disappears off-screen. The footsteps are heard again and the heavy breathing quiets down until it is no longer heard.
Deleted content: It turns out to be David Ward visiting the Myers house. He gets a closer look and, upon closer inspection from the porch, sees the light from the living room. He doesn’t know what to make of it. The door is locked and both windows are boarded up, so he can’t clearly see into the house. He decides to pull off one of the pieces of wood with a crowbar and get in through one of the windows.

-From the porch, David reaches inside the window and drops in the crowbar (Cha-ching!). He then takes hold of the lower board and starts pulling himself in. He ducks his head inside. He pulls his upper torso through the open space. And then, he slips his legs and feet in. He rolls over and gets to his knees. He takes hold of the crowbar and gets up. And he looks around what is revealed to be the TV room. To his left is a side entrance. And up ahead is the back door to the dining room.

-Remembering where the light was coming from, David walks over to the side entrance. He passes through it and finds himself in the front entrance. To his left is the front door. And to his right is the stairs leading to the second floor, as well as a hallway to the right of it. The hallway leads to a closet at the end.

-David looks all the way up at the second floor. He then turns his attention to the living room entrance ahead of him. From what he can see, candles are lit inside. He passes the stairs and walks into the living room. He sees candles lit all over the place. And he also sees an open coffin resting on a couch in the middle of it. He looks around at all the candles, then back to over to the open coffin. He shrugs.

David Ward: “If I didn’t know better, that coffin was meant for me. Sooner or later, my curiosity is going to get the best of me. But it looks too small.”

-David begins walking over to coffin. As he does, he tenses up. What is he getting himself into? He walks up to the coffin and stops in front of it. And when he sees the boy laying inside it, he is stunned.

David Ward: “What in the…”

-As David stands there, the camera pans away from him and over to the back entrance of the living room leading to the kitchen. Within the darkness of the entrance, a figure is seen stepping into place. And within the darkness, the only mistakable feature is a pale face. The camera pans back over to David. He steps back from the coffin in disbelief. He then looks around at all the candles again. They had to be lit recently. He looks over to the side entrance. Then, over to the back entrance. No one is there. He shrugs.

David Ward: “What the hell is going on here?”

-Cut to the point of view of the mysterious figure as he/she steps out of the dining room and into the TV room. Heavy breathing is heard.

-Back in the living room, David steps back up to the coffin.

David Ward: “Hey, kid, wake up…”

-Cut to the point of view of the mysterious figure as he/she steps out of the TV room and into the front entrance.

David Ward: “…Come on, kid, wake up…”

-The boy, completely knocked out, remains unconscious. David shrugs and reaches into the coffin. He takes hold of the boy and carries him in his arms. He turns around and what he sees next is a tall figure stepping out of the front entrance and into the living room. He stops in his tracks and is revealed to be wearing blue overalls. He is also wearing a white Halloween mask. He is Michael Myers.

David Ward: “Oh my gosh…”

-Michael remains by the side entrance and faces David. He stares him down with his dead-like eyes, while breathing heavily. David can’t believe it. He tenses up. He then begins speaking up.

David Ward: “I don’t know what’s going on here…but you’re not touching this kid. You’ll have to go through me first.”

-David slowly steps around. With the corners of his eyes still on Michael, he gently places Stephen back into the coffin. He turns around and still sees Michael facing him. Michael faces him and raises his knife (Swi-i-i-i-ish). David faces Michael and tightly grasps the crowbar (Clench!). They continue to face each other for a moment. And then, David runs for the back entrance.

-Michael watches as David disappears into the kitchen. He then starts walking after him and the suspenseful version of the “Halloween” theme begins playing. David runs to the back kitchen door. He runs up to it and tries opening it. To his discovery, it is locked.

David Ward: “No! No fucking way!”

-David takes hold of the crowbar and smashes it through the window (Smash! Shatter!). He reaches through the broken window and tries to unlock it from the outside. Michael suddenly walks around from the living room entrance and starts heading in his direction. David, struggling to get the door open, sees him and shrugs.

David Ward: “Come on, come on!”

-Michael quickly approaches. David, realizing he’s going nowhere with it, pulls his arm back in and runs for the dining room door. He runs through the dining room and finds himself back in the TV room. Seeing the front window he crawled in through, he bolts for it. He runs up to the window and quickly gets down to his knees. He takes hold of the lower board and starts crawling out.

-David pulls his upper torso through the opening. He then tries pulling his legs through. And before he can, a force pulls him back in.

David Ward: “No! No!”

-Michael, taking hold of David’s legs, pulls him back him into the TV room. David’s head smashes part of the top board (Crunch!), while his chin scrapes the bottom one.

David Ward: “Aaah!”

-Michael drags David from the window over to the dining room entrance. As he does, David’s bloody chin scrapes against the wooden floor. At the same time, he has still not let go of the crowbar. Its curved end is scraping against the wooden floor (…Ccchhhkkkttt…). Michael drags David into the dining room and lets him go. David wearily rolls over.

David Ward: “Ahh…”

-The next thing he sees is Michael reaching down for him. As Michael’s reaches down for David’s throat, David fights back and strikes him in the head with the crowbar (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back and David sighs of relief. He then starts getting up. Michael stumbles back to the wall (Thud!). David gets up and faces Michael. Michael steps a foot away from the wall and faces David.

David Ward: “I bet that hurt.”

-Michael faces David, breathing heavily. He then starts stepping forward. David starts stepping back and around the dining room table. As he does, he bravely speaks up.

David Ward: “Jamie Lloyd. Jimmy Lloyd. Debra Strode. John Strode. Tim Strode. Do those people mean anything to you? I never knew them, but they mean something to me. But apparently, their stories aren’t as important. Not like Laurie Strode’s. Do you even know what I’m talking about? Do you know about the cover-up?”

-David continues stepping back around the dining room table. He steps past the TV room entrance. As Michael continues keeping up, his dead-like eyes remain fixed on David.

David Ward: “I guess it doesn’t matter. All you must be thinking about right now is killing me. And that kid. I don’t know what his story is, but you won’t be killing either of us.”

-David continues stepping back around the dining room. And as he approaches the kitchen entrance, he turns around and runs for it. David runs into the kitchen. He runs up to the back entrance and into the living room. He stops at the corner to catch his breath. He then peeks through the entrance. He sees the dining room door closing shut, but doesn’t see Michael coming.

-David ducks his head back and braces himself. He stands there by the entrance, ready to swing the crowbar the second he sees Michael. David waits there for a moment with his arms swung back. As he continues to wait, Michael suddenly appears behind him. He steps out from the front entrance and into the living room. He sees David off guard. He slowly steps up behind him and raises the knife in his right hand (Swi-i-i-i-sh).

-As David and Michael play their cat-and-mouse games, Stephen finally awakens. He sits up in the coffin. He looks around behind him and sees a strange man in a mask stepping up behind another strange man he’s never seen before. Seeing a greater threat in Michael, he speaks up.

Stephen Lloyd: “W-watch out!”

-Michael stops in his tracks and turns his Halloween-masked head to Stephen. And David turns around. He shrugs and strikes the crowbar at Michael’s chest (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back and David follows. David strikes the crowbar at Michael again (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back and is struck with crowbar once more (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back and is struck with the crowbar once again (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back and is struck by the crowbar one more time (Thwonk!).

-Michael stumbles back into the front wall (Thud!) and David strikes him with the crowbar some more (Thwonk! Thwonk!). David strikes him again, this time in the head (Thwonk!). David strikes Michael once more (Thwonk!). He strikes Michael once again (Thwonk!). He strikes Michael one more time (Thwonk!). And he strikes Michael in the head one last time (Thwonk!).

-Michael’s had enough. David stops the attack and faces Michael. Michael faces David. His dead-like eyes stare right through him. He grasps his head wounds. And blood is eventually seen dripping out of the right eye hole of his mask. His dead-like eyes finally shut down and he slumps back to the wall. His upper torso slides down to the wooden floor and his legs slide out in front of him. And the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down.

-David steps back as he also sees Michael’s Halloween-masked head sag over. David can’t believe what he’s done.

David Ward: “I can’t believe it. It’s like ‘David and Goliath.’ And I’m really David. The others will never believe me. Neither will the whole town. I have to call the police.”

-David pulls out his cell phone to call the police. He also turns his attention to Stephen sitting up in the coffin.

David Ward: “It’s over, kid. I stopped him. It’s all over.”

-David walks up to the coffin and picks up Stephen. He helps him out of the coffin and starts leading him over to the side entrance. He also leads him the long way around to the side entrance to avoid walking past Michael.

David Ward: “So, how did you get here?”

Stephen Lloyd: “I don’t know.”

-David and Stephen begin stepping through the side entrance.

David Ward: “And what’s your name?”

-Before Stephen can answer, Michael suddenly picks his head up and reaches over. He takes hold of David’s leg, and David ends up dropping his cell phone.

David Ward: “Ahh!”

Stephen Lloyd: “Aaaahhh!”

-Michael immediately begins getting up.

David Ward “Kid, get out of here!”

-Stephen runs over to the first available exits he sees. He runs up to front door. As he discovers, it’s locked.

Stephen Lloyd: “No! No!”

-Michael rises all the way back up. As he does, David strikes the crowbar at his chest (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back into the wall again (Thud!). David strikes the crowbar at him again (Thwonk!). David strikes the crowbar forward once again (Swish!), this time in the direction of Michael’s head. But this time, Michael catches it with his right hand (Clench!).

-Michael looks down at the curved end of the crowbar in his right hand. He then looks down at David. David gulps. Michael looks on down at David, staring him down with his dead-like eyes. He then suddenly swipes the straight end of it from David (Cha-ching!). Michael looks down at the crowbar in his hands. David gulps again.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #10  
Old 05-21-2012, 07:41 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 9

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGE. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Michael breathes heavily, as if wondering how he should use the crowbar. But instead, he tosses it aside (Cha-ching!). David sighs of relief. Michael turns his attention back to him, and David gulps once more. He faces David. David faces Michael. David begins stepping back. Michael begins stepping forward.

-Stephen, having no luck with the front door, watches as Michael continues the cat-and-mouse games with David. David steps back. Michael steps forward. And then, David shrugs and tries running for the kitchen entrance in the back. Michael, however, steps forward and takes hold of David’s shoulder (Clench!).

David Ward: “No!”

-Michael pulls David over and takes hold of his other shoulder (Clench!).

David Ward: “No! No!”

-Michael stares David down. David gulps once again. And his right hand reaches over for his throat (Clench!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Stephen steps aside as Michael walks David into the front entrance. Michael walks David past the front entrance and into the front hallway. He slams David into the side wall (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael turns around and slams David into the opposite wall (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael slams David into the other wall again (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael slams David into the opposite wall again (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-As Stephen witnesses Michael assaulting David in the front hallway and finds himself trapped, he runs for the stairs. He stops at the fifth step and looks down at the broken step coming after it. He takes hold of the railing and tries pulling himself up to the seventh step. Meanwhile, Michael slams David into the other wall once more (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael slams David into the opposite wall once more (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael slams David into the other wall once again (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael slams David into the opposite wall once again (Thud!)

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Stephen manages to pull himself up to the seventh step. He then continues climbing up the stairs as quickly as he can. Meanwhile, Michael slams David against the other wall one more time (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael slams David into the opposite wall one more time (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael slams David into the other wall one last time (Thud!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-And finally, Michael proceeds to slam David into the closet door at the end of the hallway. David is sent breaking through the closet door, smashing it to pieces (Crunch! Smash! Cha-ching!).

David Ward: “ARGH! Argh…”

-David, laying in a pile of rubble in the closet, as in anguish.

David Ward: “Ahh…”

-Up in the second floor, Stephen runs into one of the bedrooms. He stops and looks at the available places to hide. Either under the bed or in the closet.

-Back downstairs, David wearily looks up to see Michael reaching down for him.

David Ward: “No! No!”

-With his left hand, Michael reaches down for David’s throat (Clench!).

David Ward: “Argh! No!”

-Michael lifts David up from the floor and forces him against the wall (Thud!).

David Ward: “No! Argh! No!”

-With his left hand, Michael holds David against the wall. And with his right, he raises his kitchen knife (Swi-i-i-i-ish). He stares David down with his dead-like eyes and breathes heavily. He then swings the knife back (Swish!).

David Ward: “No! No! Argh!”

-Michael swings the knife forward and stabs it into David’s chest (Shing! Splatter!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs David again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

David Ward: “ARGH!”

-Michael stabs David once more (Shing! Splatter!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs David once again (Sha-shing! Splatter!)

David Ward: “ARGH!”

-Michael stabs David one more time (Shing! Splatter!).

David Ward: “Argh!”

-Michael stabs David one last time (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

David Ward: “ARGH!”

-And Michael stabs the knife into David’s chest one extra time (Shing! Splatter!).

David: “Argh! ARGH! Argh…”

-With Michael’s left hand still forcing David’s body against the closet wall, David’s head sags over. A moment of dead silence follows. Michael looks on at David’s lifeless body. He breathes heavily and tilts his Halloween-masked head to the side. He then steps back and lets go of David’s body (Thud!).

-Michael steps away from the closet. He turns around and walks out of the hallway. He walks out it into the front entrance and stops. He slowly turns around and looks up at the second floor. Where could Stephen be hiding? As Michael begins stepping forward, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing.

-Michael walks up to the stairs. He climbs up the first step. He climbs up a few more steps. He climbs up to the fifth step and climbs right over the broken sixth step. He reaches the seventh step and continues climbing to the top of the stairs. He reaches the top of the stairs and stops. He turns his Halloween-masked head around the second floor.

-To Michael’s left is a bedroom. Up ahead is a bathroom. To his right is a hallway leading to an abounding corner. Past the abounding corner is a hallway to the right. Along the hallway are three bedrooms. At the end of the hallway is an abounding corner. And past the abounding corner is a hallway to the right leading to one more bedroom.

-Stephen could be in any of the bedrooms or the bathroom. Michael first turns his attention to the bedroom to his left and walks right in. Present inside the bedroom is a desk, bed and closet. Michael walks right up to the bed, takes hold of the mattress, and flips it over (Thwump). Not present underneath is Stephen. Michael then looks over to the closet. He walks right up to it, takes hold of the binding doors, and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Stephen is not inside.

-Michael steps out of the first bedroom and over to the bathroom. He walks right in and pulls open the curtains to the shower (Screech!). Not present is Stephen. He then steps over to the closet and pulls the door open (Cha-ching!). Stephen is not inside.

-Michael steps out of the bathroom and over to the second bedroom in the next hallway. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in a notch. Present inside it, as well as the first and remaining bedrooms, is a desk, bed and closet. Michael walks right up to bed and flips over the mattress (Thwump!). Not present underneath is Stephen. He then heads right for the closet. He steps up to it and pulls open its binding doors (Screech! Screech!). Stephen is not inside.

-Michael steps out of the second bedroom and into the third one in the middle of the hallway. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in another notch. Michael walks right up to the bed inside and flips over the mattress (Thwump!). Not present underneath is Stephen. He then heads right for the closet. He steps up to it and pulls open its binding doors (Screech! Screech!). Stephen is not inside.

-Michael steps out of the third bedroom and into the fourth one at the end of the hallway. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in one more notch. Michael walks right up to the bed inside and flips over the mattress (Thwump!). Not present underneath is Stephen. He then heads right for the closet. He steps up to it and pulls open its binding doors (Screech! Screech!). Stephen is not inside.

-Michael steps out of the fourth bedroom and stops in his tracks. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down. Michael turns his Halloween-masked head over to the other bedrooms and the bathroom. Stephen was not in any of those rooms. He saw Stephen run up the stairs when he slammed David into the side wall. There’s only one room left for him to be hiding in.

-Michael turns his attention to the open doorway of the fifth bedroom in front of him. He then begins stepping forward. As he does, the eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. Michael makes his way down the last hallway and into the last bedroom. He walks in and stops. He turns his Halloween-masked head to the bed, then over to the closet. He breathes heavily. He is tired of playing hide-and-seek with this kid.

-Michael steps forward. He steps up to the bed and stops. Cut to a point of view from underneath the bed. Could Stephen be down there? Michael reaches down and takes hold of the mattress. He then suddenly flips it over (Thwump!). As Michael discovers for himself, Stephen is not there.

-Michael steps away from the bed and looks over to the closet. As he does, the eerie “Halloween” theme plays on. Now, he knows where Stephen must be hiding. He starts walking over to the closet. As he does, cut a point of view from inside the closet. The darkness of Michael’s shadow is seen coming closer and closer. Michael steps right in front of the closet and stops. From inside the closet, Michael’s heavy breathing can be heard. For what feels like forever, his shadow stands still and doesn’t move an inch.

-Finally, Michael reaches forward. His left and right hands reach for each of the knobs on the binding doors. He takes hold of them and slowly begins pulling them open (Scre-e-e-e-ech…Scre-e-e-ech…). From inside the closet, the darkness begins disappearing. Michael continues to slowly pull open the binding doors (…Scre-e-e-e-ech…Scre-e-e-e-ech…). More of the darkness inside the closet continues to disappear and become one with the darkness in the remainder of the bedroom.

-Michael finishes pulling open the binding doors (…Sre-e-e-e-ech…Scre-e-e-e-ech). He lets go of them and looks inside. At first, he can’t see anything. And then, he turns his Halloween-masked head over to the right. Then, over to the left. As Michael discovers, that is exactly where Stephen is hiding. Stephen, cowering in the left corner, looks away from Michael. He is helpless. Michael stands his ground. He stares down at Stephen with his dead-like eyes and breathes heavily. He then begins raising the bloody kitchen knife (Swi-i-i-i-ish).

-The camera focuses on Michael’s right arm as he raises the knife all the way up into the air. And it remains focused on it as Michael swings the knife forward (Swish!). As his arm proceeds to swing forward some more (Swish! Swish! Sah-wish!), the eerie “Halloween” theme stops cold and the screen fades to black.

Director commentary: In the case of David Ward, curiosity killed the cat. But in the matter of Stephen Lloyd, a lot of factors went into the decision to let Michael kill him. First of all, the Druid cult was firmly in control of the situation. Stephen’s fate was kind of inevitable.

Director commentary: The only obstacle was David. Let’s say Stephen found the window David broke into. He escapes and lives to see another day. The main characters find out about Stephen, and he becomes involved in the main action on Halloween evening after all. I thought this idea through. It would have made the main action more complicated. All the action I had planned out on Halloween evening was already very tight and anymore contribution from Stephen didn’t fit.

Director commentary: This is also intended to be the final “Halloween” film and it has an all-star cast. The stakes are higher than ever before. All bets are off. Sometimes, it makes sense to sacrifice an important character to show how dire the terrifying situation truly is. Even if that important character might be a child.

Director commentary: Lastly, this story follows the school of thought that Dr. Wynn ordered Michael to physically impregnate Jamie Lloyd. Stephen’s existence is to represent Jamie’s innocence, Michael’s blood and ultimately Thorn itself - before Thorn is ready to continue with the next generation. In the event of a happy ending, what will the main characters tell Stephen when he grows up and asks about his parents? It’s a touchy subject.

Director commentary: So, Stephen’s fate was inevitable. At the very least, I approached it in a non-exploitive manner. It’s one thing to kill a kid in a story like this. It is a whole other thing to go about it in inappropriately.

Deleted content: The following morning, on the day of Halloween, Kara and Tommy discover another note from the Druid cult. They aren’t made aware of Stephen Lloyd’s fate, but they are told to not trust the local police. Meanwhile, Lindsey heads out to town. Along the way, she sees the local police investigating a crime scene at the Myers house. She immediately recalls what Tommy, as well as Kara, told her the night before and reluctantly goes to the cemetery.

-Cut to the cemetery. Lindsey drives her SUV into the parking lot and parks (Screech!). She walks through the cemetery, passing graves to her left and right. She then stops at a grave and faces it. The camera cuts to the tombstone: Laurie Strode.

Lindsey Wallace: “All right, that’s where she is. Now, where’s the rest of them?”

-Lindsey begins walking away from Laurie’s grave and past others. She stops and finds herself at the graves belonging to Peter Myers, Margaret Myers and Judith Myers. She looks beyond them and sees no more Strodes.

Lindsey Wallace: “Maybe I missed them.”

-Lindsey walks away from the Myers’ graves and retraces her steps. She walks all the way back to Laurie’s grave and stops. She looks beyond it and sees no more Strodes.

Lindsey Wallace: “This isn’t happening. It can’t be happening. The only explanation is that they lied to me about where they were buried. Well, I’m not letting them get the last laugh.”

-Lindsey starts walking away. She then stops in her tracks. In the back of her mind is a growing uncertainty and she cannot avoid listening to it. She sighs.

Lindsey Wallace: “Dammit.”

-Cut to the mortuary one moment later. Lindsey walks right up to the door and knocks on it. The caretaker opens it and Lindsey cuts right to the chase.

Lindsey Wallace: “Hi. I’d rather not waste any of your time, but I can’t find the graves of some people I knew. Could you point me in the right direction?”

Caretaker: “Of course I can. It’s no problem. What are their names?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Great. Um, let’s see…John Strode, Debra Strode and Tim Strode…”

-The caretaker shrugs and shakes his head. Not another fanatic!

Lindsey Wallace: “…And also, Jimmy Lloyd and Jamie Lloyd.”

-The caretaker looks on at her and bluntly speaks up.

Caretaker: “They aren’t here.”

Lindsey Wallace: “What do you mean, they aren’t here?”

Caretaker: “What I mean is, they aren’t here. They were never here.”

Lindsey Wallace: “They were never here? What is that supposed to mean? That they were never buried in this cemetery, or that they never lived here in Haddonfield period?”

Caretaker: “Both. I’ve never seen them in the directory, and have never seen any tombstones with their names on them. And for that matter, I wouldn’t personally know if they lived here or not.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Really?”

-The caretaker sighs of frustration.

Caretaker: “Yes. Really. When will you fanatics get a life and stop coming up with this bullshit?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Bullshit? This is far from bullshit! I remember Jamie Lloyd! I remember what happened to her! I remember what happened to her parents! I remember the Strodes moving into the Myers house. And I remember what happened to them! How can you say they were never here? And how dare you call me a fanatic! Do you know how I am?”

-The caretaker sarcastically speaks up.

Caretaker: “Well, please! Tell me! I would love to know!”

Lindsey Wallace: “I’m Lindsey Wallace! I experienced what happened here in 1978. And I know just about everything that has happened here since. What are you setting out to do by desecrating our town’s past?”

Caretaker: “I haven’t desecrated a single thing here, lady. And if you really experienced what happened so long ago, no wonder you’re here wasting my time! It made you nuts in the head! What’s next? A cover-up and a conspiracy? Because I’ve already heard that before!”

-Lindsey can’t believe what she’s hearing! In the back of her mind, her uncertainty is growing and more pieces of the puzzle are falling into place. She faces the caretaker for a moment in total disbelief. She then sighs of frustration and walks away in a huff.

Lindsey Wallace: “Unbelievable!”

-Moments later, Lindsey gets back in her SUV (Slam!) and starts the ignition (Rrrrr!...). She drives away from the cemetery and into the next block of the neighborhood. She drives down a few more blocks. As she does, she mutters to herself.

Lindsey Wallace: “there’s only one more way to prove it.”

-Moments later, Lindsey pulls her SUV up to the realty office in town. She gets out of the SUV and walks right in. Moments later, she walks back out. She gets back into her SUV (Slam!) and doesn’t know what to believe anymore.

Lindsey Wallace: “What the hell is going on here? This isn’t a perfect world, but even in an imperfect world, Tommy could not be right. He just can’t be. He’s Tommy.”

-Lindsey looks on for a moment. She takes it all in and struggles to make sense of it. And then, she sighs and starts the ignition of her SUV (Rrrrr!...).

-Moments later, Lindsey pulls her SUV into the parking lot of the motel. She shuts off the ignition (…Rrrrr…) and gets out (Slam!). She enters the manager’s office and walks up to the front counter.

Lindsey Wallace: “Hi. Can you tell me if a Tommy Doyle is staying here? Or a Kara Strode?”

-Moments later, Lindsey walks up to room ten. She stops in front of it and takes a deep breath. She can’t believe what she is about to do. She shrugs and knocks away. She hears voices inside and the door eventually opens. Answering the door is Tommy.

Tommy Doyle: “Lindsey.”

-Lindsey faces Tommy for a moment, then speaks up.

Lindsey Wallace: “I believe you.”

-Cut to the diner later on in the morning. Having breakfast are Kara, Danny, John, Tommy and Lindsey.

Lindsey Wallace: “…You’re right, there is something going on. At the cemetery and even at the realty office. I had to check the records for myself. And according to them, no one has lived in the Myers house since Judith Myers’ murder.”

Tommy Doyle: “You don’t say?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yes. Other than what you told me yesterday, I don’t know what to make of it. For that matter, I don’t even know how to believe everything you told me…but I believe you.”

Tommy Doyle: “You do?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yes…for the first time in so many years…I believe you. I have no one else to believe.”

John Strode: “Welcome to the club. It wasn’t so easy for me to believe them, either.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, now that you know, I would like your permission to use my old house.”

Lindsey Wallace: “For what?”

Tommy Doyle: “You must know what happened at the Myers house last night.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I do. And I can’t believe it.”

Tommy Doyle: “I can. And I believe that it’s Michael. I believe that he’s still here. With your permission, I would like to use my old house as a setting for a trap. To stop him.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Sure. You have my blessing. It’s your house. Do you have an idea what to do?”

Tommy Doyle: “With my house currently being renovated, the possibilities are endless.”

TO BE CONTINUED TOMORROW...

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 10-10-2012 at 07:12 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #11  
Old 05-22-2012, 12:07 PM
That is the first 74 pages and there is 107 left. By the time the Myers house has seen some action on October 30th, it is 140 pages into the longer cut. Overall, there's about 190-odd pages of setup and 130-odd pages of action. There really is a lot of dramatic stuff I had to leave out for a reasonable "running time." I ultimately had to leave out more dramatic scenes in the setup, so that most the action on Halloween evening would remain.

Unfortunately, there will be a longer commercial break before the next portion of the story. Sorry. Something's come up and I will not be able to post for a week. It's nothing serious, but I will be away from the computer. To be continued next Tuesday.
Reply With Quote
  #12  
Old 05-28-2012, 09:24 PM
Has it been a long week? It wasn't fun for me either. Suffered a minor health ailment and had to take it easy. So, I suppose this extended commercial break has been paid for in part by the good doctors at your local health clinics and hospitals. Mike was not pleased with me pausing the final chapter of his legacy for a whole week. Believe me, he desires and needs the closure badly. He wants nothing but retirement at this point. Nonetheless, he did celebrate Memorial Day and honored veterans from our past and present. We had some drinks and he was able to relax. H9 will, or should, continue tomorrow on Tuesday as promised and throughout the week - as long as God doesn't drop another sudden bomb on me (just kidding!).

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 05-28-2012 at 09:28 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #13  
Old 05-30-2012, 06:41 PM
Another long day? Sorry everyone, I was busy yesterday and never had time. finally, the next part of the story.
Reply With Quote
  #14  
Old 05-30-2012, 06:57 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 10

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Deleted content: Later on that morning, Benny Granger wakes up with a bad hangover. He remembers his discussion with his friends about facing Lindsey and helping her with the Doyle house. He gets ready, calls off work for the day, and in no time arrives at the Doyle house.

Deleted content: Ordinarily, Lindsey would not be surprised to see Benny trying to make up with her on Halloween. She knows that he is aware of what the holiday truly means to her. However, this isn’t an ordinary Halloween. She doesn’t want him to get involved and possibly get hurt. She sympathizes with Benny and begs him to let them work out their differences on another day. Especially not another Halloween in which something eventful has taken place at the Myers house. Benny, however, insists that he stick around and give her a hand, since Michael may evidently still be in Haddonfield. Lindsey is unable to push Benny away and she tells him the truth. She tells him about Tommy and the Strodes, and their plans to stop Michael.

-Cut to the living room of the Doyle house later on that morning. The front door opens and Benny walks right in. Lindsey walks in after and shuts the door. Benny looks all around the living room. From the fireplace and window on the far side wall, to the front window, to the front door, to the dining room entrance and the back entrance leading to the den.

Lindsey Wallace: “By now, I’m finished with the living room.”

Benny Granger: “I can tell. It looks nice.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I’m working on the kitchen now. It’s past the dining room here.”

-Benny steps on into the dining room. Lindsey follows him as he looks around the dining room, then wanders into the kitchen.

Lindsey Wallace: “I never really knew before. Were you friends with Tommy? Were you ever in his house before today?”

Benny Granger: “Before 1978? I don’t think so. If I did, I’d probably remember how small this kitchen is. And how small the dining room is as well. It might as well be an extension to the kitchen.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I thought the exact same thing.”

Benny Granger: “You tore down part of that wall, didn’t you? To make the kitchen appear bigger.”

Lindsey Wallace: “How do you know?”

Benny Granger: “I can tell. I can recognize my handiwork within yours. To think, you did this in a week. It’s impressive.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Well, I learned from the master.”

-Benny steps out of the dining room and back into the living room. Lindsey follows him as he wanders through the back entrance and into the den. Directly to the left is the stairs leading to the second floor. Further to the left is a bathroom. And to the right is a closet. Working on the den is Kara and Danny. Lindsey turns to them.

Lindsey Wallace: “Kara, Danny, I want you to meet someone. This is Benny Granger.”

-Kara and Danny greet Benny.

Kara Strode: “Hi, Benny.”

Danny Strode: “Hey.”

-Lindsey turns to Benny.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny, this is Kara and Danny Strode. They’re from Mr. Strode’s brother’s side of the family.”

Benny Granger: “Well, it’s nice to meet you.”

-Benny walks past Kara and Danny, and over to the open doorway of the bathroom. He looks around inside, then walks over to the closet. He opens the door and takes a look. He then turns to Lindsey.

Benny Granger: “You were within an inch of this closet when you tore down the kitchen wall, weren’t you?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I was. I paid close attention to that. And also to the wiring.”

-Benny shuts the closet and walks back over.

Benny Granger: “I can tell. It certainly worked out.”

-Lindsey turns to Benny, then back to Kara and Danny.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny is a contractor. He helped me renovate my house. He agreed to help us tonight with the trap.”

Kara Strode: “Well, we’re glad to have your help.”

Benny Granger: “I’m glad to be of help.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Come on, let me show up the upstairs.”

-Cut to the second floor. Lindsey steps up from the top step. Benny follows and the first thing he takes notice of is the open bedroom door to their right. He peeks inside and takes a look. He then steps over to the hallway turning back. The first thing on that hallway is another open doorway to a bedroom. Benny steps over to it and looks inside.

Lindsey Wallace: “I’ve only had a chance to work up here a little bit. There’s a lot to cover.”

Benny Granger: “You’re right about that.”

-Benny steps away from the doorway and walks down the hallway. Lindsey follows him as he stops at the end of the hallway. Benny stops and looks down the hallway leading to left past the railing. He then turns his attention to the open doorway leading to the bathroom along that hallway. He steps up to it and looks inside.

-Benny steps away from the doorway and over to the hallway leading to the right. He walks in and finds open entrances to two bedrooms. The one to the right is another point of entry into the second bedroom. The one to the left leads to the third bedroom. Benny walks right in and looks around. To his right are the doors leading to the balcony. Notably, the binding doors to the closet are broken through. Benny steps back into the hallway.

Lindsey Wallace: “So, what are you thinking?”

Benny Granger: “I’m liking it so far.”

-Benny steps back into the main hallway. Lindsey follows him as he passes the open doorway of the bathroom and to the end of the hallway. Beyond it is another hallway leading to the right. Benny turns the corner and Lindsey follows. Along the hallway are two back windows. Lindsey follows Benny to end of the hallway. Beyond it is another hallway leading to the right.

-The first thing on the next hallway is the open doorway to the fourth bedroom. Benny steps up to it and looks inside. Inside the bedroom, he discovers John working on it. Benny turns to Lindsey.

Benny Granger: “Who is this?”

Lindsey Strode: “That is John Strode. He’s from Laurie Strode’s side of the family.”

-John walks over to greet them. As he does, he turns to Benny oddly. Didn’t he see him at the bar the other night?

John Strode: “Uh, hi…”

Lindsey Wallace: “John, this is Benny Granger. He’s a contractor. He’s going to help us tonight with the trap.”

John Strode: “Oh. Well, nice to meet you, Benny.”

-Tommy walks over from the other end of the hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “What’s going on?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Tommy, this is Benny Granger. He wants to help us tonight with the house.”

-Lindsey turns back to Benny.

Lindsey Wallace: “And Benny, in case you don’t recognize him, this is Tommy Doyle.”

-Benny turns to Lindsey, then back to Tommy.

Benny Granger: “I remember.”

Tommy Doyle: “I remember you, too.”

Benny Granger: “It’s been a long time.”

Tommy Doyle: “It sure has.”

-Benny looks on at Tommy for a moment, then walks away. He walks past Tommy and down the hallway. Along the hallway is the other point of entry into the bathroom. Benny steps up to the open doorway and looks inside. He then walks to the end of hallway. Beyond it, leading to the left, is one more hallway leading to a dead-end.

-The first thing on the last hallway is the open doorway to the fifth and final bedroom. Benny steps up to its open doorway and looks inside. He walks in and disappears inside. Lindsey then turns to Tommy.

Lindsey Wallace: “He knows the first part of why you’re here. He doesn’t know the rest yet.”

Tommy Doyle: “Are you sure about this?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I’m sure. He’s the guy I told you about yesterday.”

Tommy Doyle: “Him?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yes.”

Tommy Doyle: “You mean, you and Benny?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah. He came over to make up. I tried to keep him away, but he insisted. Listen, he’s a contractor. He helped me renovate my house. If there’s anyone who can figure something out by tonight, it’s him. He knows what he’s doing.”

Tommy Doyle: “Okay.”

John Strode: “Sounds like a plan.”

-Benny steps out of the fifth bedroom and back into the hallway. He walks over to others and speaks up.

Benny Granger: “Well, I really like the upstairs to this house. And I really like the curvy hallway. And not to mention, the placement of the bathroom. You can either walk all the way around, or take a shortcut through the bathroom. It’s brilliant. The whole upstairs is like a maze. It couldn’t be more perfect.”

Lindsey Wallace: “We feel the same way.”

Tommy Doyle: “Imagine playing hide-and-seek up here. Lindsey and I did all the time when we were kids.”

Benny Granger: “Too bad I missed out.”

Lindsey Wallace: “What we’re not sure of yet is what to do. We have this whole floor, but what can we do with it?”

Benny Granger: “There’s plenty you can do with it. I’ve already thought of something. What you’re in need of is booby traps.”

Tommy Doyle: “Okay. Sounds great. Can it be ready by the early evening?”

Benny Granger: “You kidding? We have the whole afternoon. As long as nobody slacks off, it could be ready by the late afternoon. As far as the condition of this house is concerned, it’s still in one piece. And the renovations added to it are enough. What we have to do now is go to the hardware store and get the materials we need. I’ll go downstairs and check what you have and don’t have. I’ll make a list.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Okay.”

-Benny starts walking away. He then stops and turns to Tommy.

Benny Granger: “Tommy, why don’t you go with me to the store? I could use a hand to get everything in the truck.”

Tommy Doyle: “Sure.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I’ll go, too. I can’t wait to see Drew’s face when he sees Tommy. It will be a reunion.”

Benny Granger: “If you want.”

-Benny starts walking away. Tommy turns to Lindsey questionably.

Tommy Doyle: “Are you talking about Drew Mackenzie?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yeah. He runs the hardware store now.”

Tommy Doyle: “You’re kidding? You’re right, it will be a reunion.”

Deleted content: They go to the hardware store and Drew is happy to see Benny and Lindsey working together again. He also couldn’t be more surprised to see Tommy. While there, Drew informs them that the sheriff came forward with what happened at the Myers house. One of the visiting fanatics was killed, as well as a strange boy. Right away, Tommy can’t help but wonder. Was it Stephen Lloyd? Is it too late?

Deleted content: Drew goes on about how the fanatics were able to get past his sensors and make a fool out of him. As far as he’s concerned, the poor fanatic got what he asked for. Benny takes notice of how both Tommy and Lindsey show particular concern for a strange boy they don’t know and begins wonder about Tommy. Did he come back to tell stories again? Could he be messing with Lindsey’s head?

Deleted content: Also, I paid close attention to the overall interior of the Doyle house (as well as the Wallace house’s interior) in the original movie. I didn’t change anything around; they simply didn’t show a whole lot of the upstairs in the movie. I paid close attention to the outside appearance and interior to figure out how the remainder of the upstairs might logically look, and coming up with the labyrinth-like floor was fun in itself. It pays off beautifully during the main action.

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the early afternoon. Cut to the Doyle house. In one of the upstairs bedrooms are Kara and John working on a trap.

Kara Strode: “…I can’t imagine how you must feel right now. Ten years ago, I held him in my arms. I took care of him the way I took care of Danny when he was a baby. Until they took him away, I saw him. But you didn’t. You never knew about him until yesterday. And now, you might never get to see him.”

John Strode: “That might be true. But we still don’t know for sure.”

Kara Strode: “I know. I know we don’t. I just can’t help but think that…”

-Kara hesitates and sighs. John turns to her and speaks up.

John Strode: “That they already lined him up for Michael and didn’t inform us.”

Kara Strode: “Uh, yeah. Why else would a strange boy turn up here?”

John Strode: “The simple answer is, we don’t know. Maybe we’re best off not knowing. At the very least, I never got to know him at all. I never saw him. So, there’s no emotional attachment between him and me. Maybe it’s for the better. If he was in their hands all this time, maybe there was no way for us to save him.”

Kara Strode: “Maybe…do you realize that finding out about you is one of the few good things about this trip? You are the only reason I didn’t want to wake up this morning and find myself back at home. To find out that it was all a dream.”

John Strode: “I can understand that. Until yesterday, I never stopped dreaming and took control of my life. I was asleep for three years, burying myself deeper into a job that I don’t really care about. My answer to all the tragedy was to not think about it and focus on anything else. This trip is the first time I slowed down and faced all of it. And it isn’t as painful as I long feared it would be.”

Kara Strode: “That’s good.”

-In another bedroom are Danny and Tommy working on a trap.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen, when this is over, things are going to change at home. For the better. For all of us.”

Danny Strode: “Does that mean we’ll no longer be in hiding?”

Tommy Doyle: “It might.”

Danny Strode: “Does that mean that I’ll be Danny Strode again? And no longer Matthew Leighton?”

Tommy Doyle: “Why? Is that want you want?”

Danny Strode: “More than anything. I don’t like lying to people about who I am. The more I’ve lied to people, the more confused I’ve become about my identity.”

Tommy Doyle: “I had no idea you felt that way. Why didn’t you come to us about it?”

Danny Strode: “Because I couldn’t. You were no longer Tommy. You were…Brian. And my mom was someone else.”

Tommy Doyle: “Is that why you’ve been acting out? Because you felt you had no one to turn to?”

Danny Strode: “Yeah.”

Tommy Doyle: “Wow. Well, I’m sorry I made you feel that way. I never meant to alienate you like that. And neither did your mom.”

Danny Strode: “I’m sure you guys didn’t.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, whether we’re ever allowed to become our former identities again, it’s not our names that define us. It’s our actions. I was just as scared to step out of reality and into witness protection. Obviously, I wasn’t there for you and your mom in the beginning. It would be five years before I became part of the family. I was lucky to be placed in the same state and town as you and your mom at all. Now that I think about it, they probably made sure I was placed there with both of you, so it would be easier to keep tabs on us.”

Danny Strode: “Whenever you came over, I thought you were pretty cool. I actually thought you were cool when I first met you.”

Tommy Doyle: “What about now? Now that I’m Tommy Doyle again, do you think I’m cool again?”

Danny Strode: “You couldn’t be any cooler. You’re really smart with the Halloween stuff.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah, I guess I am…but you realize there’s more to life than Halloween, don’t you? Halloween is just one particular time of the year that defines the culture we live in. When I was your age, I never stopped obsessing about Halloween and Michael Myers. I should have. Part of me regrets it. And another part of me is glad that I was able to meet you and your mom. It goes both ways. When this is over, I plan on letting all of it go and moving on. I hope you do same.”

Danny Strode: “I want to. But what do you mean by, ‘when it’s over?’ Do you really think that we can stop them, and that they’ll leave us alone?”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s a good a question. It’s something I’ve been reading about. You remember what happened to us, don’t you?”

Danny Strode: “Everything.”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, you might realize by now that they intended to use you as the next carrier of Thorn. You were seeing visions for a reason. You were inflicted with Thorn. And Michael was supposed to pass Thorn onto you. Do you know what I’m talking about?”

Danny Strode: “I know exactly what you’re talking about.”

Tommy Doyle: “What we wound up doing ten years ago was preventing their prophecy from coming true. You are no longer inflicted with Thorn. It’s been passed on to someone else. You’re safe.”

Danny Strode: “I am?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, you are.”

Danny Strode: “And some other kid has it now instead?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. Somebody does. And this Halloween, they’re trying to fulfill that prophecy. That’s why we’re all here. And apparently, Michael may have already killed Stephen Lloyd.”

Danny Strode: “I still can’t believe that…”

Tommy Doyle: “I know. But we could be wrong. Either way, it’s up to us to stop Michael and the cult. And if we are able to stop Michael for good, we’ll end up breaking their prophecy again. If we don’t stop him, we could be waiting for another Halloween.”

Danny Strode: “How do we stop him?”

Tommy Doyle: “Well, I think I know how. And it may not be necessarily killing him. If I can reach out to him and free him of Thorn, we’ll be saving his life and the life of the next carrier of Thorn. We might end up putting the whole cult out of business for a long while. Thorn will have to start over. And I think we’ll be safe. They won’t be able touch us.”

Danny Strode: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think so.”

Danny Strode: “Wow. Then, that means we could get out of hiding.”

Tommy Doyle: “It could.”

-In another bedroom are Lindsey and Benny working on a trap.

Benny Granger: “…I have to ask. Do you really think Tommy is doing better now?”

Lindsey Wallace: “I know he is. After high school, I stopped believing him and his stories. Now that he’s back, I’ve had the chance to know him again. I believe him now.”

Benny Granger: “Are you sure about that? How do you know that he isn’t influencing you? Have you considered the possibility that he’s trying to take advantage of you?”

-Lindsey sighs.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny…”

-Benny shrugs.

Benny Granger: “Hey, this has nothing to do with my insecurity. I trust you. I just don’t trust him. There’s something weird about him.”

Lindsey Wallace: “You’re right. Tommy is acting weird. Since Halloween so long ago, he’s always been weird. If you knew his whole story, you’d understand why.”

Benny Granger: “Okay. Then, tell me. I would like to know. Until I feel I can trust him, Michael Myers isn’t the only person I’m watching out for at the moment.”

-Lindsey turns to Benny for a moment, then begins speaking up.

Lindsey Wallace: “All right. Do you remember what happened ten years ago?...”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #15  
Old 05-30-2012, 07:06 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 11

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Deleted content: Lindsey tells Benny how she personally knew Tommy growing up and how he’s changed since. She also tells him about how Laurie left Haddonfield in the early `80’s, had John, and kept coming back over the years to see Jamie. Right down to the car accident in 1987 that she survived but killed Jimmy Lloyd. He finally begins to understand what is going on and trust Tommy.

Deleted content: Benny also asks a good question. If Laurie Strode was supposed to be safe in witness protection, how did Michael find her in 1998? Lindsey chooses to stay quiet about the details for now. They finish setting up the traps in late afternoon and have time to take a walk in the neighborhood.

-Later on in the late afternoon, all six of them are walking down the neighborhood. Benny turns to Kara and Danny.

Benny Granger: “So, I understand that you two were the ones who moved into the Myers house several years ago. I’m sorry about what happened.”

Kara Strode: “Thank you. This is why we’re here. To put an end to it.”

Benny Granger: “Better now than never…”

-Benny turns to Tommy.

Benny Granger: “…And you helped them. You were there.”

Tommy Doyle: “I was. I know that you and Lindsey, as well as everyone else in town, probably didn’t think much of me at the time. But as it turned out, I was at the right place at the right time.”

-Benny turns to John.

Benny Granger: “And you’re supposed to be Laurie Strode’s son.”

John Strode: “That’s who I am.”

Benny Granger: “I’m sorry about what happened to her.”

John Strode: “Thanks. That’s also why I’m here. To put an end to the bullshit.”

Benny Granger: “Amen.”

-They continue walking down the block and Benny turns back to John.

Benny Granger: “I have to ask. Did an inmate really murder your mother?”

-John turns to Benny for a moment. Fully believing Tommy and the others about a cover-up, he speaks up.

John Strode: “No.”

-Benny, getting the message, shrugs.

Benny Granger: “I guess not.”

-Moments later, they find themselves approaching the Myers house. They all take immediate notice of it. They stop in front of it and stop. All six of them look at the house.

-Cut to a point of view from inside the TV room. All six of them can be seen through the window. No one is seen or heard inside the house.

-Back outside, they continue looking at the Myers house. Tommy then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “I’m not afraid. Are the rest of you?”

Kara Strode: “I’m not, either.”

Danny Strode: “No way.”

John Strode: “I’m not afraid.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Deep down, I’ve always been afraid. But I’m not anymore.”

Benny Granger: “I’m not afraid one bit.”

-Cut back to the point of view from inside the house. No one is still not seen or heard.

-Back outside, Tommy speaks up again.

Tommy Doyle: “You know what, no matter what we say, I think we’re all a little afraid. But it doesn’t matter. With what we have planned, he’ll be more afraid of us.”

-They continue looking at the house. Then they start walking away.

-Cut back to the point of view from inside the house. All six of them can be seen walking down the sidewalk and disappearing. Heavy breathing is heard.
Deleted content: Before Halloween evening, they have time to stop at the diner for a bite. While there, Benny begins asking more questions. And this time, Lindsey puts it upon herself to convince him that there is a cover-up of some sort going on. After all, she’s been to the realty office. She knows that records belonging to several of the neighborhood homes – once owned by those who died on Halloween from 1988 to 1995 – have been altered. On top of that, just about every family who lost someone in those Halloweens either moved away or had job transfers. There is almost nobody from the earlier era left to prove that there isn’t a cover-up going on.

Deleted content: Benny doesn’t know what to believe. He can’t help but feel like this is a story being orchestrated by Tommy. He even refuses to believe that the graves belonging to the deceased Strode family have been desecrated. To prove their side of the story, they ultimately leave the diner and go to the cemetery to show Benny the technical lack of evidence. Benny still doesn’t know what to believe. Who says that Kara and Danny’s family were buried there in the first place? He doesn’t personally remember. This could still be a story being orchestrated by Tommy. This scene brings up another good question. What about all the others that died on those particular Halloweens? Are their graves also missing?

Deleted content: Finally, they go to the realty office and Lindsey shows Benny the altered records. And he finally starts believing them. He knows that Lindsey wouldn’t jeopardize her career over a silly Halloween prank. From there, Lindsey and Benny go back to her house to make up, and the others go back to the motel to get ready.

-Cut to town later on in the early evening. Cut to the motel. Getting ready in room ten are Kara and Tommy.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen, I’ve been thinking about this. I don’t think that you, Danny and John should be at the house with us tonight. You might be safer staying here at the motel.”

Kara Strode: “Safer? I know, as well as you do, that we aren’t safe here at all. We don’t just have Michael Myers to watch out for. There’s also a Druid cult, and anybody in town could be one of them. Why do you suddenly think we’d be safer here?”

Tommy Doyle: “Because I’m starting to wonder if the cult is actually here.”

Kara Strode: “Why?”

Tommy Doyle: “Because there was a reason they covered up what happened here in the past. They made mistakes. They almost exposed themselves to the outside world. And they can’t risk that again. It would just mean going to the extra trouble to start another cover-up.”

Kara Strode: “What about those messages? Somebody knows we’re here.”

Tommy Doyle: “Right. And if it was Stephen Lloyd who was killed last night at the Myers house, it could have been the cult who brought him there. Either way, it doesn’t matter. Because I think they’re allowing Michael to work alone this time. I think they’re staying in the shadows.”

Kara Strode: “You think so?”

Tommy Doyle: “I have a good feeling about it.”

Kara Strode: “Well, even if that’s true, we don’t know for sure. And until we do, I would feel safer with you and others at the Doyle house than here.”

Tommy Doyle: “All right.”

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the early evening. Cut to the Wallace house. Laying in bed are Lindsey and Benny.

Lindsey Wallace: “I missed you.”

Benny Granger: “I missed you, too.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I missed having you around.”

Benny Granger: “I missed the way you looked up to me.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I missed how much you turned me on when you work with tools.”

Benny Granger: “And I missed being able to turn you on when I’m in charge of that kind of environment.”

-They both look on for a moment. Lindsey then speaks up.

Lindsey Wallace: “Seriously, I don’t want us to split up again.”

Benny Granger: “I don’t want us to, either.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I want you to know something. In the last six years, you’re the only man I’ve ever been with. Whenever we were split up, there was no other guy in my life. And I’m not going to lie. Before I started seeing you, there were other guys. But none of them compare to you.”

Benny Granger: “Really?”

Lindsey Wallace: “Yes. I don’t want you to feel threatened. You’re the guy for me. No one will ever replace you. How does that make you feel?”

Benny Granger: “It makes me like a million bucks…”

-Benny looks under the covers and turns to Lindsey in a suggestive manner.
Benny Granger: “…Actually, it makes me feel like two million bucks if you know I mean.”

Lindsey Wallace: “I know exactly what you mean. And we still have fifteen minutes before we have to be at the house. I guess we’ll have no time to clean up.”

Benny Granger: “Actually, we will…if we clean up together. Right now.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh…shower sex. Let’s go!”

Benny Granger: “Okay!”

-Both of them starting getting out of bed.

Deleted content: That is naturally all I show in that particular scene. I only show “after-the-fact” scenes. What they do behind closed doors is none of our business. Benny and Lindsey shortly meet up with the others at the Doyle house. The others helpfully bring take-out from town since they weren’t able to have their meals at the diner. They move the couch from the living room into the den, where Kara, Danny, John and Lindsey wait. Meanwhile, Benny watches the front and Tommy hangs around to tell him the truth about the cover-up.

Deleted content: Notably, there are also two deputies in a cop car watching over the Myers house. One of them talks honestly about how scared he will be if he sees Michael and has to go into the house at all. He is also baffled by the crime scene he saw earlier that day. Why did they find the coffin, candles and strange kid there? The other deputy, on the other hand, has a disturbing knowledge on the topic of darkness. The darkness that exists all over the world and the darkness that exists within ourselves. He is a Druid member and he knows that they have a long, uneventful evening to look forward to.

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the early evening. Cut to the Doyle house. Waiting in the back are Kara, Danny, John and Lindsey. Watching the front are Tommy and Benny. Benny, grasping a rifle, is pacing back and forth from living room to the dining room. Tommy watches as Benny steps into the dining room, looks out the front window, and then looks over into the kitchen. Benny steps back into the living room. As he walks over to the front window and looks out, he speaks up.

Benny Granger: “So, tell me. What’s been going on here?”

Tommy Doyle: “For starters, Lindsey told me about the number of fanatics intruding on Haddonfield the last several years…”

-Benny continues pacing back and forth from each room, and Tommy continues.

Tommy Doyle: “…I’m not surprised that other people have been looking into the cover-up themselves. We can’t be the only people who remember. What does surprise me is how disrespectful they’ve become. I remember people coming here before `95 and asking about Halloween. They used to be courteous towards us.”

Benny Granger: “That’s true. For a long time, we were open with the tourists. They were bound to ask about Halloween. What happened in 1978, and later on in `88 and `89. And after what happened in `95, we started wondering if we helped bring that bastard back by talking about it. That’s when we decided to keep quiet about it and stop telling the tourists what they wanted to hear. By 1998, when we heard he was reported in California, we started feeling comfortable with that decision. As long as we stayed quiet about it, maybe he’d stay away for good.”

Tommy Doyle: “I can understand that line of thinking.”

Benny Granger: “So, what does all this mean? That the fanatics have been right all along? That by denying our past, we helped erase it?”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s an interesting thought. But it’s not anything you or anyone else in Haddonfield have done intentionally.”

Benny Granger: “Then, who? Whose behind the cover-up? Why is this happening?”

Tommy Doyle: “You really want to know?”

-As Benny walks over towards the dining room, he stops and turns to Tommy.

Benny Granger: “Yes, I do. I was asked before how I felt about part of our history being erased. I’m not comfortable with it. Forgetting about our past is not the answer to coping with the tragedy. It just can’t be forgotten like it never happened.”

Tommy Doyle: “I agree. We all do. Imagine how Kara and Danny feel. Laurie Strode’s story continues to be told, yet their story is being denied.”

-Benny walks up to Tommy.

Benny Granger: “Then, tell me already. What the hell has been going on here the last ten years?”

-Tommy turns to Benny for a moment. How should he begin to tell him the ugly truth?

Deleted content: Tommy doesn’t tell Benny the ugly truth. He knows that they need him and can’t afford to get on his bad side. He tells him that it is a conspiracy between the town officials and the government.

Deleted content: In no time, Michael makes the first move of the night. They discover one of the lights at Lindsey’s house turned on. They wait an hour and then come to a decision. Benny will check out Lindsey’s house and John will join him. John personally volunteers to. He would rather not sit on the sidelines and do nothing. Naturally, the others are scared and don’t want either of them putting theirselves in greater danger. But all of them are playing a cat-and-mouse game with Michael Myers. They have already put themselves in danger by being there.

Deleted content: Benny heads out to Lindsey’s house with John. Along the way, he gives John a switchblade to defend himself with. Meanwhile, Tommy is convinced that it is a diversion. Michael will not be at Lindsey’s house. He is the one who suggested that Benny check out her house. That way, if Michael shows up as expected, they can take Michael by surprise and free him of Thorn. Benny never has to know about the ugly truth at all.

Deleted content: Tommy also goes against Benny’s wishes and doesn’t lock the back kitchen door. He keeps it unlocked, so that they can beat Michael to the chase. And his instincts prove to be correct. As soon as Benny and John begin making their way to Lindsey’s house, Michael makes his presence known at the Doyle house. He opens the back door, a bell attached to the door rings, and the game is on. Tommy tells the others to go upstairs and wait for him. And he waits in the den for Michael to show himself.

-Cut to the living room of the Doyle house. And cut to the dining room entrance. A tall figure in blue overalls and a white Halloween mask steps out of the dining and room and into the living room. Now in full view, Michael looks around the living room. He sees nobody. He then turns his Halloween-masked head over to the entrance leading to the den. Within the den is Tommy with a sledgehammer. Seeing a glimpse of Michael, he steps back out of sight. He steps back towards the stairs.

-Michael stands his ground in the living room breathing heavily. With his dead-like eyes directed towards the den, he starts stepping forward. He steps up to the entrance. He passes through it and finds himself alone.

-Upstairs on the second floor is Tommy. He peeks around the railing and sees Michael. Michael looks around the den. He looks over to the closet to his right, then over to the bathroom door to the far left. As he looks away from the bathroom door and over to the stairs, Tommy ducks back out of sight. Michael looks all around the den. He then directs his attention to the closet. Tommy, watching his every move, mutters to himself.

Tommy Doyle: “That’s right, check out the closet first…”

-Michael walks right up to the closet door and opens it. Nobody is there. He leaves the door open and walks over to the bathroom door.

Tommy Doyle: “Now, over to the bathroom…”

-Michael walks right over to the bathroom door. He opens it and looks inside. Nobody is there.

Tommy Doyle: “Now, over to the stairs…”

-Michael steps back from the bathroom and looks over to the stairs. He stands his ground and breathes heavily. He then starts stepping forward. As soon as he does, Tommy starts stepping back. Michael walks up to the stairs. He stops in front of it and looks up to the second floor. He climbs up the first step. He climbs up the second step and the remainder of the stairs. He climbs up from the top step to the second floor.

-Michael steps around and looks around the first hallway. To his right, beyond the stairs, is the closed door to the first bedroom. To his left, in the hallway turning back, is the closed door to the second bedroom. At the end of the hallway is another hallway turning to the left. And along the second hallway is the closed bathroom door.

-Michael first turns to bedroom to his right. He takes hold of the doorknob and begins turning it. He turns the doorknob and begins swinging the door open. He swings the door all the way open. And suddenly, a sledgehammer hooked up to the ceiling swings down (Swish!) and strikes him in the chest (Thwonk!). Michael takes the hit and stumbles back. He stumbles back into the door to the next bedroom (Thud!).

-Michael, grasping his chest, steps away from the door and back over to the first bedroom. He looks inside and sees nobody at first. He steps past the sledgehammer hanging from the ceiling and walks in. He walks in and looks around. The room is empty. All that is present is the closet built into the wall.

-Michael stands his ground and breathes heavily. He then starts stepping forward. He walks right over to the closet, takes hold of the binding doors, and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there.

-Michael steps back out of the first bedroom and over to the second one. He takes hold of the doorknob, turns it, and pulls the door open. And just as before, a sledgehammer is released from ceiling. It swings over (Swish!) and strikes him in the chest (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back and into the first sledgehammer in the other bedroom (Thwonk!).

-Michael grasps his chest and back. He then steps away from the first bedroom and back over to the second one. He steps past the sledgehammer hanging from the ceiling and looks inside. All that is present is a closet and another door. He walks right over to the closet. He takes hold of the binding doors and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there. Michael steps back from the closet and looks over to the other door. He also looks up at the ceiling. There is no other sledgehammer waiting to surprise him in that room.

-Michael steps out of the second bedroom. He walks out through the same way he came in. He finds himself back in the first hallway and starts walking up it. He walks down the hallway and past the railing to his left. He stops at the end of it and looks down the hallway turning to his left. He then looks over at the bathroom door along the second hallway. Finally, he looks over to the hallway leading to the right. Where is he going to look first?

-Michael steps into the hallway to his right. As he discovers, there are bedroom doors to the left and right. He already knows where the one to his right leads. Where does the one to the left lead? Michael takes hold of the doorknob and turns it. He starts pulling the door open.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #16  
Old 05-30-2012, 07:16 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 12

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Michael then stops and remembers the surprises the first two bedrooms left him. He continues pulling the door open and steps aside. And suddenly swinging through the doorway is a sledgehammer (Swish!). It strikes the tension of the air and swings back and forth (Swish! Swish!). He reaches over and it stops it (Clench!).

-Michael steps past the sledgehammer hanging from the ceiling and walks into the third bedroom. Present inside is a closet, as well as doors to the balcony. He looks over to the closet, then over to the balcony. And he heads for the closet first. He walks right up to the closet, takes hold of the binding doors, and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there.

-Back outside on the balcony, both doors open. Michael steps out and walks over to the railing. He stops and looks around. Nobody is there.

-Michael steps out of the third bedroom and back into the second hallway. He walks up to the bathroom door and immediately pulls it open. He quickly steps back and watches as another sledgehammer swings into the doorway (Swish!). He reaches over and stops it (Clench!). He then steps up to the doorway and looks inside. Nobody is there. However, there is another door on the other side. And hooked up to the ceiling above it is another sledgehammer.

-Michael steps away from the bathroom and continues up the hallway. He turns the corner and starts making his way down the hallway leading to the right. He passes the first window to his left. He passes the second window to his left. He reaches the end of the third hallway and stops. In front of him is the closed door to the fourth bedroom. And to his right is another hallway leading to the right.

-Michael steps up right to the fourth bedroom and pulls the door open. He remains where he’s standing and catches the sledgehammer swinging from the ceiling (Clench!). He then takes hold of the sledgehammer and tears it from the ceiling (Smash! Crunch! Cha-ching!). He steps into the bedroom and tosses the sledgehammer aside (Cha-ching!). Michael then looks around. All that is present is a closet. He walks right over to it. He takes hold of its binding doors and pulls them open (Screech! Screech!). Nobody is there.

-Michael steps out of the fourth bedroom and back into the fourth hallway. He starts making his way down it. He passes the other door to the bathroom to his right. He already knows what’s waiting for him inside. He walks to the end of the hallway and stops. In front of him is the closed door to the fifth and final bedroom. To his left is the last hallway leading to a dead end.

-Michael turns his Halloween-masked head to the darkness waiting for him at the end of the hallway. He misses the darkness. He’s tired of playing hide-and-seek. He, or Thorn, could not be more ready to finish off the Strodes once and for all, and wait to start all over again with a new generation.

-Michael turns his attention back to the fifth bedroom. He reaches forward and takes hold of the doorknob. He turns the doorknob and starts pulling the door open. As he does, he steps aside. And as he proceeds to swing the door completely open, one last sledgehammer is released from the ceiling. It swings over into the doorway (Swish!) and Michael reaches over to catch it (Clench!).

-Michael tears the sledgehammer from the ceiling (Smash! Cha-ching! Crunch!). He steps into the bedroom and tosses the sledgehammer aside (Cha-ching!). He then looks around and sees Kara, Danny, Tommy and Lindsey in the back. He stands his ground and faces them. He breathes heavily and stares them down with his dead-like eyes. For a moment, Michael stands his ground. He’s been waiting for this. Finally, he begins stepping forward. Kara then turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Whatever you’re going to do, do it now…”

Tommy Doyle: “Hold on…”

-Tommy, grasping the sledgehammer in his left hand, braces himself. And in his right hand is a chain hanging from the ceiling. Michael continues stepping forward.

Lindsey Wallace: “Hurry up…”

Tommy Doyle: “Wait for it…”

-Michael steps closer towards them and into the middle of the bedroom. Tommy then shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “Now!”

-Tommy pulls on the chain hanging from the ceiling (Ching!). It pulls back and releases a chained netting from the middle of the ceiling (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!...). It falls onto Michael and nearly causes him to collapse forward (…Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). He picks himself back up and faces them.

-With the sledgehammer in his hands, Tommy approaches Michael. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing. Michael reaches up with both arms, struggling to pull the netting off of him (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing! Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). Before he can, Tommy steps right up to him and strikes him with the sledgehammer (Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!). Michael takes it and stumbles back. Tommy strikes Michael once more (Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!) and continues his assault (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-i-ing!).

-Michael takes every hit and continues stumbling back. Tommy continues assaulting him (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!), until Michael collapses onto his knees (Thud! Cha-chi-i-ing!). Tommy steps back and then continues the assault (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!).

-The others watch as Tommy assaults Michael with one blow of the sledgehammer followed by another (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!). For once in a long time, Michael is unable to defend himself. Tommy continues assaulting Michael until he’s almost out of breath (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwo-o-onk! Cha-chi-i-ing!). He assaults Michael a few more times (Thwonk! Thwonk! Thwonk! Cha-chi-i-ing!).

-On the next blow (Thwo-o-onk! Cha-chi-i-ing!), Tommy is out of it. And so is Michael. He cannot take anymore abuse. He falls over to his side and onto his back (Thud! Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down and Tommy steps back. He catches his breath and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “It worked…I just did everything I possibly could to keep him down.”

Kara Strode: “You certainly did.”

Lindsey Wallace: “What do we do now?”

-Tommy turns to Lindsey, then over to the open door to see Benny and John not back yet. He turns back to the others and prevails.

Tommy Doyle: “We finish it.”

-Back across the street, the front door to the Wallace house opens. Benny and John both walk out onto the front porch. Benny shuts the door and both of them start running for the Doyle house. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing again.

Benny Granger: “Well, he wasn’t here. He must be at the other house. Let’s go!”

-Back in the Doyle house, the others stand around Michael’s unconscious body. Tommy opens the occult book and pulls out a slip of paper with a spell written on it. It is not directly from the book. He made it up. It is based on what he learned about Druid mythology. Tommy looks down at the slip of paper, then over to the others. He then begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn. Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Back outside, Benny and John run across the street and up to the Doyle house.

-Back inside, Tommy continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment. Don’t listen to the torment…”

-Back outside, Benny and John run up to the front door. Benny pulls out the keys to unlock it.

-Back inside, Tommy continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

-Back downstairs, Benny and John run in. They first run over to the dining room and look over to the kitchen. Upon seeing the back door hanging open, Benny shrugs.

Benny Granger: “They must be upstairs! Come on!”

-Back upstairs, Tommy continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo…”

-Suddenly, Michael sits up in a mechanical manner and turns his Halloween-masked head to Tommy. The others tense up and step back. Tommy, bravely facing the evil that is Thorn, also steps back and continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-With the chained netting still on him, Michael reaches down to the floor and starts picking himself up.

Tommy Doyle: “…Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

-Michael stands back up. He then reaches up to pull the chained netting off of him.

Tommy Doyle: “…Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer…”

-Michael pulls the chained netting over his head and drops it behind him (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). He faces them and begins stepping forward. The others start stepping back towards the doorway.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow yourself to become consumed by it. And continue listening to Wunjo…”

-Tommy and the others step back into the hallway. Michael steps after them.

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul. And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn…”

-Tommy and others step further out into the fourth hallway. Michael steps out of the bedroom and into the hallway. And suddenly, Benny and John run in from the next hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and…”

-Benny, seeing an opportunity, aims the rifle forward and fires (Bang!). Michael takes the shot in the chest and stumbles back into the last hallway. Tommy and the others are startled. Tommy also sighs of frustration. Until Benny interrupted, he had Michael where he wanted him.

Tommy Doyle: “Dammit.”

-Lindsey turns to Benny and sighs of relief.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny!”

-Benny walks right over to the last hallway and steps past the others.

Benny Granger: “Stay back!”

-Benny steps around into the last hallway and sees Michael waiting for him. He aims the rifle at him and fires (Bang!). Michael takes shot and stumbles back. Benny steps after Michael and fires again (Bang!). Michael stumbles back further into the hallway. Benny continues stepping forward and firing the rifle at Michael (Bang! Bang! Bang!). Michael continues taking the shots and stumbling back. Benny steps forward and fires the rifle at Michael once more (Bang!). Michael is sent stumbling back into the wall (Thud!).

-Benny, realizing he’s shot the last bullet in the clip, stands his ground and bravely keeps the rifle aimed at Michael. Michael lays back against the wall and faces Benny. He also grasps the wounds in his chest. He then starts collapsing to the floor. His upper torso slides down the wall and his legs slide out in front of him. His Halloween-masked head also sags over. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down.

-Benny lowers the rifle and looks on at Michael’s body. He then starts stepping back. With his eyes still on Michael, he steps back into the next hallway. He then turns to the others.

Benny Granger: “It’s all right. I got him. He’s dead.”

Tommy Doyle: “Is he?”

-Benny turns to Tommy in an odd manner and speaks up.

Benny Granger: “I have a better question. What the hell were you doing when we got back here? What were you saying?”

-Suddenly, Michael picks his head back up and looks over at Benny. Benny turns to the others and shrugs.

Benny Granger: “Get back! Get back now! Go downstairs!”

Lindsey Wallace: “But, Benny…”

Tommy Doyle: “We better listen to him! Let’s go!”

-Tommy, Lindsey and the others starts walking back into the next hallway. Benny stays where he is in the corner of the fourth and fifth hallways and stands his ground. He watches as Michael reaches down and gets to his knees. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing once more. As Michael begins getting back up, Benny empties the rifle (Ching!) and puts in a new clip (Cha-ching!).

-Michael stands all the way back up and faces Benny. Benny, raising the rifle, faces Michael. Michael begins stepping forward. Benny stands his ground and keeps the rifle aimed towards him. He then fires at him (Bang!). Michael stops and ducks aside. He then continues stepping forward.

-Benny fires the rifle at Michael again (Bang!). Michael stops and ducks aside again. He then continues stepping forward and Benny fires once more (Bang!). Michael stops and ducks aside once more. As before, he continues stepping forward.

-Benny watches as Michael continues stepping forward. He waits for it and then fires at Michael (Bang!). This time, Michael is hit. He takes the shot and stumbles back. Benny shrugs and continues firing at him (Bang! Bang! Bang!). Michael, caught in the line of fire, stumbles all the way back to the wall (Thud!).

-Michael grasps the wounds in his chest, then the wall behind him. He looks back up and faces Benny. Benny faces Michael. Michael then lets go of the wall and starts stepping forward. Benny can’t believe what he’s seeing. How much can one man take? Finding himself a little scared, he starts stepping back into the fourth hallway. He then shrugs and runs for the third hallway.

-Michael continues stepping forward. He steps up to the end of the fifth hallway. He turns the corner and starts making his way down. And instead of going the long way around, he walks right over to the second door to the bathroom.

-Michael pulls the door open and walks right in. Waiting for him on the other side of the door is a sledgehammer. It starts swinging down from the ceiling (Swish!). Unexpectedly, the gravitational force of the sledgehammer is no match for the anger and hatred brewing within Michael. As Michael walks in, the sledgehammer bounces off his chest (Thwonk!). Michael’s force also tears it from the ceiling (Smash! Crunch!) and to the floor (Cha-ching!).

-Back in the third hallway, Benny braces himself. He empties the rifle (Ching!) and puts in a new clip (Cha-ching!). He walks to the end of the hallway and stops. He stands his ground and waits for Michael to appear at the other end. Unexpectedly, Michael steps out into the second hallway from other doorway to the bathroom.

Benny Granger: “Oh, shit!”

-Michael steps around in the second hallway and wastes no time. He starts stepping towards Benny. Benny tenses up. He aims the rifle at Michael and fires (Bang!). Michael takes the shot to the chest and stumbles back. Benny steps forward and fires at Michael some more (Bang! Bang!). Michael takes the shots, stumbles back to the other end of the hallway, and disappears into the third bedroom.

-Benny runs right over to the open doorway of the third bedroom and sees Michael waiting for him inside. He immediately aims the rifle at Michael and fires again (Bang!). Michael stumbles back and this time takes it in the side of the neck. He reaches up to grasp the wound, but Benny doesn’t give him the time of day. Benny continues firing at Michael like there is no tomorrow (Bang! Bang! Bang! Ching!). Michael stumbles out of the bedroom, onto the balcony and collapses over the railing.

-Benny listens as Michael lands hard on the front lawn of the house (Thud!). He runs right over to the balcony and looks over the railing. Michael, laying on his back, is motionless. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down.

Benny Granger: “I got him. Well, I better have got him.”

-Benny walks away from the balcony and back into the third bedroom. Downstairs in the den, the others see Benny making his way down the stairs. Lindsey sighs of relief.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny! You’re okay!”

Benny Granger: “I am, but he isn’t.”

Tommy Doyle: “Where is he?”

-Benny steps down into the den and starts walking into the living room.
Benny Granger: “He’s outside. He fell over the balcony. Come on, follow me. Quickly.”

-Back outside, the front door to the house opens. The camera focuses on Benny as he is the first one to step out under the balcony. As the others step out after him, Benny looks on in disbelief.

Benny Granger: “No…No way…”

-As Benny and the others step out onto the front lawn, the camera finally pans back and reveals Michael not to be in sight. Evident on the lawn, however, is Michael’s imprint where the long unfertilized grass appears flatter. Also evident is blood. Benny walks up to the imprint and sighs of frustration.

Benny Granger: “I had him! I had that son of a bitch! Dammit, the moment I walked away, he got back up and disappeared! I should have watched him from the balcony and not let him out of my sight!”

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny, it’s okay! You did everything you could to stop him!”

Danny Strode: “Yeah, we heard every shot! You must shot him twenty times! You’re a hero!”

Benny Granger: “Then, where is he?”

Tommy Doyle: “Where ever he is, he couldn’t have gone far.”

Kara Strode: “Then, let’s look.”

Tommy Doyle: “He was hurt. He’s bleeding. Look for blood.”

-All six of them start looking around the lawn. John, in particular, spots some blood and finds himself stepping towards the side of the house.

John Strode: “I found blood. I think it leads to the back of the house.”

Tommy Doyle: “To the back?”

-Tommy stops looking around the front lawn and looks over to the side where John is. As he does, the camera begins panning up. It pans up from the ground floor and towards the balcony. It pans up to the railing and reveals a hand grasping it. Tommy continues looking over to the side of the house. He then slowly looks up to where Michael fell. And as he sees for himself, Michael is standing by the railing. Michael looks down at Tommy. He then lets go of the railing and steps back.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh my gosh…”

-Tommy watches as Michael steps back towards the third bedroom and disappears out of sight.

Lindsey Wallace: “What is it?”

Tommy Doyle: “He’s back upstairs. I just saw him.”

Benny Granger: “You did? But how?”

Tommy Doyle: “You think I’m making this up? Look at where his blood trail is leading. He obviously went back in through the kitchen. The moment we went outside, he must have snuck around from the kitchen to the den.”

-Benny turns to Tommy for a moment, then sighs of frustration.

Benny Granger: “Are you kidding me? We have to play this game with him again?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. He wants to play another game of hide-and-seek. And this time, he wants to hide.”

Benny Granger: “Then, dammit, let’s get back in the house! Now! Before he gets away!”

Tommy Doyle: “Come on, everybody! Let’s go!”

TO BE CONTINUED TOMORROW...
Reply With Quote
  #17  
Old 05-31-2012, 03:53 PM
props for following through with ideas.... i'm not challenging/nitpicking, but 181 pages for a Halloween sequel would be near impossible to make - lets imagine for funs sake it got interest/was used for a sequel - you'd have to chop out half of the writing.

i always get the random urge to write out my idea for the F13 sequel I had in mind. it was a prequel to Jason X and featured the character of Rowan pairing up with Tommy Jarvis, with David Cronenberg's doctor character also being a large role.

And as laughable as it is, I actually garnered an okay story idea for a Leprechaun vs. Wishmaster film years ago that I think still would be fun (if you recall the fan-made trailer that hit across the web, I randomly got ideas from it).
Reply With Quote
  #18  
Old 05-31-2012, 06:53 PM
You're forgetting that this is originally 323 pages (too much to post on this board). I left out almost half of it and summarized the deleted content. I am fully aware that 323 pages, and maybe 181 pages, is too long for an actual movie. Two hours or longer. My other "Halloween" sequels were 180 and 191 pages long (180 to 200 pages is like reading a Goosebump/young adult book). But I'm only posting H9 now for myself and the fans who still care. I already tried contacting the people at the legal Halloween comics a year and a half ago, and have given up. They didn't reply and don't seem to care about the older series. Last time I checked, they were trying newer ideas that ignore direct elements from the films. I'm posting H9, because I'm tired of sitting on it and doing nothing with it.

For several years, I've also thought about my own F13 sequel - Friday The 13th Part IX: Return to the Crystal Lake. Ignore "Jason Goes to Hell," "Jason X," "Freddy vs. Jason," and go back to the basics. They aren't bad, but those three chapters are silly sequels that seriously screwed up the simple storyline. Recently, I went back and forth with it and almost got if off the ground. I can share the feeling of wanting to do Jason justice. However, I would rather not waste my time on another fan-fiction sequel like F13, when I'm already sitting on one. That's why I'm posting H9.

I am willing to believe that you came up with a decent take on "Leprechaun vs. Wishmaster." I wrote one more fan-fiction sequel after H9, and it is "Helloween" - the "Halloween/Hellraiser" crossover). Remember that rumor from 2004? It is 195 pages long, and I took it as seriously as the "Halloween" sequels. It follows the first three "Hellraiser" films and the "Halloween 6" storyline. Believe it or not, it is a plausible idea that works. Very proud of how it turned out. And I'm thinking about sharing that next after posting the remainder of H9. but not immediately. I'll wait a little while.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 05-31-2012 at 07:27 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #19  
Old 05-31-2012, 07:03 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 13

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Deleted content: They get back in the house and Benny checks the back kitchen door. Upon seeing no damage, he realizes Michael didn’t break in like he suspected. It was never locked. Tommy didn’t lock it like he asked him to. He locks the door and confronts Tommy about it. He also asks him about the spell he overheard when he came back upstairs. And finally, the truth comes out. They tell him everything. Every dark detail of the ugly truth. They have to. Benny doesn’t believe them. He especially can’t believe Lindsey’s willingness to believe them. All he knows for sure is that they need more help, so he calls his friends.

Deleted content: While they wait for the other rednecks, a neighbor who witnessed the disturbance calls the police. The deputy handling the calls answers and shows concern. However, once he hangs up, he turns his attention to a crossword puzzle and doesn’t even bother alerting the other deputies. He is another Druid member and he is insuring that Michael can work without distractions.

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the mid-evening. Cut to the Doyle house. Danny and John are in the living room, while Kara and Tommy are in the dining room. And in the den are Benny and Lindsey. Benny continues watching the stairs, while Lindsey is pleading with him.

Lindsey Wallace: “…Benny, open your mind. You already know for a fact that there is a cover-up. It was Tommy and the others who made us aware of it. So, why are you unwilling to believe the rest of the story?”

-Benny, grasping the rifle as if it were glued to his hands, remains silent.

Lindsey Wallace: “Is it just that? Do you really think it’s a story he made up? I thought the same thing as well. I also thought that he took of advantage of Kara and her son, and somehow brainwashed them. But then, they’ve only known John for a day. Just like us, he didn’t initially believe them either. And if he is willing to believe Tommy, why can’t you?”

-For a moment, Benny continues standing by the wall and keeping his line of vision directed towards the stairs. He then turns to Lindsey and sighs. He begins speaking up.

Benny Granger: “You and the others must think that I’m the bad guy for not believing Tommy’s story. I’m just trying to be rational. You’re right, Tommy did make us aware of the cover-up. But then again, fanatics have been unsuccessfully trying to tell us the same thing for years. Right about now, I’m more willing to listen to the fanatics than Tommy. No matter how obnoxious many of them have been, they didn’t pretend to know who was behind the cover-up. You know what questions I’m wondering right now? What if Tommy found out about the cover-up, and what if he spun his own story around it? There are people who have spun their own stories surrounding Laurie Strode. I don’t care to look them up, but I’m heard many of them. They’re sick people who have no respect for us and for Haddonfield. And neither does Tommy.”

Lindsey Wallace: “So, you really don’t trust him.”

Benny Granger: “No. I don’t.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Let me ask you something. How well did you know Tommy growing up? And before he disappeared in `95?”

Benny Granger: “I wasn’t friends with him. I didn’t know him personally. Not like you apparently did. I had my own problems growing up. You know all about that.”

Lindsey Wallace: “What, that you were both picked on in school?”

Benny Granger: “Yeah. I remember how other kids mistreated him. I also remember how he behaved in school. We all heard about how both of you saw Michael Myers. However, Tommy never stopped talking about it. He was almost asking to be picked on. From what I’ve seen so far, he hasn’t changed.”
Lindsey Wallace: “That’s how I felt last night when he first told me. And then, I remembered how we grew apart from each other. I remembered how he disappeared into his own fantasy world after high school and stopped talking to people. Well, he’s not like that anymore. He’s more in touch with other people than I’ve seen him in the longest time. I’m willing to believe Tommy’s story, because I can see the change in him. He’s not trying to play games with us. He’s trying to help. I knew Tommy better than you did. If I’m willing to believe him, are you willing to give him the benefit of a doubt?”

-Benny turns to Lindsey for a moment, then looks away. He doesn’t know what to make of it. Back in the living room, Danny turns to John.

Danny Strode: “…It didn’t really occur to me until now. Ten years ago, I was supposed to become…him. And on the next Halloween, I was supposed to kill your mom. And also you. For a long time, I was alone in this. Tommy and my mom weren’t there. They had become strangers. And now that I have Tommy and my mom back, it’s only sinking in now.”

John Strode: “I know what you’re saying. It’s a disturbing thought. Well, it doesn’t matter. The first part of their prophecy didn’t end up coming true. Both of us, thankfully, didn’t end up crossing paths under those circumstances.”

-Danny turns to John for a moment, then speaks up.

Danny Strode: “Why are you so willing to believe us? You were out of the loop your whole life. You have every right to believe that Tommy is spinning his own tale off of the cover-up. And that my mom and I are fanatics pretending to be long lost family.”

John Strode: “That’s true. But you know why I am willing to believe all of you? I see a lot of my mother in your mom. My mother, when she wasn’t being paranoid, showed warmth and love. She looked out for me. And I’m seeing the same thing between you and your mom. That’s not something you can fake. That’s how I know that none of you are taking advantage of me. That’s why I’m willing to believe that there’s a weird cult out to get us.”

Danny Strode: “Oh.”

John Strode: “For that matter, I think Tommy and your mom know how you feel by now. When this is over, things are going to be different. You aren’t going to be alone anymore. You’re going to have Tommy, you’re going to have your mom, and you’re also going to have me. We’re all in this together.”

Director commentary: That is something that is tough to overlook and make 100% sense of. In H6, Michael was supposed to hand the curse over to Danny and it was supposed to be over. Laurie Strode was supposed to be legitimately deceased and John didn’t exist. However, H6 flops and they make H20 to start fresh. That means re-introducing Laurie Strode and introducing her son John. It also means that, for H6 and H20 to co-exist in this story, Michael was supposed to hand the curse onto Danny and Danny was suppose to go after Laurie and John. Does that make sense to you? It doesn’t make sense to me. Neither did the idea of Michael passing on the curse to Jamie Lloyd in H4. I can live with it though, and I did my best to work around it.

Deleted content: Anyway, Benny’s friends are still on the way. Lindsey talks to Kara and Tommy in the dining room and tells them that she tried to get through to Benny. She also asks Tommy about the Druid spell. Having seen Michael’s reaction to it, he knows it can work. That’s when Benny unexpectedly comes around. He doesn’t know how to believe their whole story, but he believes Lindsey and has witnessed Michael take eighteen shots from him. He compromises with Tommy. When the other rednecks get there, they will try luring Michael from the upstairs to the ground floor. And they’ll let Tommy try that spell again. Kara and Lindsey are glad to see their men working together on this.

Deleted content: Benny’s friends arrive and they are surprised by the sudden turn of events. Drew Mackenzie has already reunited with Tommy, but Russ Mayer, Gary Stamos and Milo Thatcher haven’t yet. All four of them are surprised by the return of Kara and Danny Strode, but they are especially surprised to meet John Strode. Until now, they didn’t know why Laurie Strode suddenly left Haddonfield in the early `80’s. And obviously, they are surprised to learn that Michael Myers is in the house and waiting for them on the second floor. Benny informs them of their plan and they go up to the second floor, while Tommy waits downstairs.

Deleted content: This is where Benny takes charge for the first time in his life. He really wants to stop Michael and put an end to all this. Drew is especially impressed with Benny’s confidence and performance. They decide to break up into groups. Russ and Gary check the first two bedrooms, while Benny, Drew and Milo check the bedrooms in the back.

Deleted content: Milo, however, is difficult. Against Benny’s wishes, he suggests that he check the third bedroom and balcony on his own, while Benny and Drew check the bathroom and bedrooms in the very back. Benny, who has had it with Milo’s macho attitude over the years, sighs of frustration and lets him do as he pleases. He also tells him to watch his back. All five of them look for Michael and he is not to be found in any of the bedrooms or the bathroom. This sequence leads up to a moment where they believe that Michael must be in the closet of the fifth bedroom with the chained netting. Where else could he possibly be? Well, he isn’t there either. After looking for him in the third bedroom and the balcony, it is Milo who discovers Michael’s very clever hiding spot. He chose to stayed behind and wait a moment before catching up with the others.

-Back outside, the camera pans down from a tree on the front lawn of the Doyle house. It pans past branches and down towards the balcony. Milo can be seen looking over the balcony. As he looks down at Michael’s imprint on the front lawn, he mutters to himself.

Milo Thatcher: “Eighteen shots, my ass. No way can any man take eighteen shots. Maybe they can take a few shots and get up from a fall, but eighteen? No way. He must have missed that son of a bitch a lot more times than he claimed.”

-Milo steps away from the railing and starts walking back over to the third bedroom. As he approaches the open doors, the rattling of chains are heard (Ching! Cha-ching!). Milo stops and looks up oddly. He then steps back and looks up towards the roof. And next thing he knows, the chained netting from the fifth bedroom is released upon him (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!). Its weight causes the strength and stature of Milo to collapse backwards to the balcony (Thud! Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!).

Milo Thatcher: “Argh! Ahh!”

-Michael lowers himself from the roof. He lowers himself back onto the balcony and steps over to Milo. Milo, suddenly not feeling so tough, braces himself.

Milo Thatcher: “No! No!”

-Michael gets down to his knees and looks down at Milo. He stares down at him with his dead-like eyes and breathes heavily. He then reaches for the chained netting over Milo’s head. He takes hold of it (Clench! Clench!) and pulls it out from underneath his head (Ching! Cha-ching!). He then takes it and starts wrapping it around Milo’s neck (Ching! Cha-ching!).

Milo Thatcher: “No! Argh! No!”

-Michael wraps the chained netting around Milo’s neck and into a loop (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!). He then gets up and steps back. He takes hold of the rest of the netting (Clench! Clench!) and pulls it off of Milo’s body (Ching! Cha-ching!). He takes the end of it and starts dragging Milo away from the open doors of the third bedroom (Chi-i-i-i-ing…).

Milo Thatcher: “Argh! What are you doing? Stop! Argh!”

-Michael drags Milo over to the railing and stops (…Chi-i-i-i-ing). He takes the end of the chained netting in his hands and starts wrapping it around the railing (Ching! Cha-ching!).

Milo Thatcher: “You can’t! Argh! You can’t! No! Argh!”

-Michael wraps the chained netting around the railing and into a loop (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!). Milo pulls himself up to his knees and struggles with the netting around his neck (Ching! Cha-ching!). Next thing he knows, he sees Michael reaching for him.

Milo Thatcher: “No! Argh! No!”

-With both hands, Michael reaches for Milo’s neck. He takes hold of the chained netting around his neck (Clench! Clench! Ching! Cha-ching!) and begins lifting him up. Milo, struggling to breath, finds himself being lifted up from the balcony and over the railing.

Milo Thatcher: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael lifts Milo all the way up with his outstretched arms. He looks up at him and stares him down with his dead-like eyes.

Milo Thatcher: “Argh! Argh! No!”

-Michael continues looking all the way up at Milo. He then finally lets him go. Milo is released from Michael’s hands and into gravity. Gravity lowers Milo from above the balcony and drops him below it. Gravity lowers Milo below the balcony and down towards the front lawn. Milo is within three feet of the lawn until something stops the power of gravity’s force. It is the other end of the chained netting wrapped around the balcony. It recoils (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!) and instantly breaks Milo’s neck (Crack! Crunch! Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!).

Milo Thatcher: “ARGH!”

Deleted content: The other rednecks check up on Milo in the third bedroom. Benny and Drew discover his body hanging from the balcony and go back inside the bedroom to inform Russ and Gary what has happened. Realizing their plan has severely backfired, they try to figure out what to do next.
Benny Granger: “…He was quick. And he was smart. He was never in any of the rooms. He was probably waiting on the balcony the whole time. And he used the chained netting I used on him. He hung Milo with it.”

Russ Mayer: “You don’t say? Poor Milo…”

-Benny turns to Gary by the doorway.

Benny Granger: “Gary, watch yourself. He’s somewhere on the floor.”

-Gary shrugs and looks around. He looks over to the other end of the second hallway. Michael isn’t there. He then looks over to the closed door to the second bedroom behind him. He looks back over to the others and stays put by the open doorway.

Drew Mackenzie: “…Benny, Milo is dead. So far, this plan isn’t working.”

Benny Granger: “I know it isn’t. The first mistake was letting Milo check on his own. We should have been firm with him and checked the balcony together…”

-Back by the doorway, the camera focuses on Gary and the door behind him. It begins focusing beyond Gary and more on the door. Very quietly, it begins opening up. It slowly opens, revealing darkness behind it. And the darkness itself begins taking on a life of its own. Something within the darkness begins taking shape. And a pale face appears.

-Michael slowly appears in the open doorway of the second bedroom and the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins picking up. He steps out of the doorway and into the hallway. He steps up behind Gary and begins raising his kitchen knife (Shi-i-i-i-ing). Michael stops a couple feet behind Gary and raises the knife all the way up into the air (Shi-i-i-i-ing). He then swings the knife forward (Swish!) and stabs Gary in the shoulder (Shing! Splatter!).

Gary Stamos: “Argh!”

-Benny, Drew and Russ all shrug.

Benny, Drew and Ross: “Gary!”

-Michael swings forward (Swish!) and stabs Gary in the shoulder again (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

Gary Stamos: “Argh!”

-Drew shrugs and aims his rifle towards Gary and Michael. He takes his chances and tries firing at Michael (Bang!). As Michael swings the knife forward once more (Swish!), he is suddenly shot in the neck. He takes the shot and stumbles back into the second bedroom. Drew runs out of the third bedroom, runs past Gary, and bravely steps into the second bedroom. Waiting for him inside is Michael. He breathes heavily and faces Drew. Drew faces Michael.

-Drew then aims the rifle at Michael and fires (Bang!). Michael takes the shot to the chest and stumbles back. Drew steps forward and fires his rifle some more (Bang! Bang!). Michael takes both shots and stumbles back towards the other doorway.

-Back downstairs in the den, Tommy braces himself. So do Kara, Danny, John and Lindsey in the living room. Back in the second hallway, Benny and Russ tend to Gary.

Gary Stamos: “…Ahhh…”

-Benny then steps down the second hallway and watches as Michael stumbles out of the second bedroom and over to the first one (Bang! Bang!). Drew steps out of the second bedroom and walks right into the first one (Bang!). Michael stumbles back once more and Drew attempts to fire at him again (Ching!). As it turns out, the clip in his rifle is now empty.

-Drew looks down at the rifle, then up at Michael. Michael stares right over at Drew with his dead-like eyes and starts stepping forward. Drew starts stepping back. Michael continues stepping forward and Drew continues stepping back. As they play their cat-and-mouse game and step back into the first hallway, Drew tries reaching for another clip from his jacket.

-Before Drew can even try reloading his rifle, Benny suddenly fires at Michael (Bang!). Michael stumbles back into the first bedroom and Drew sighs of relief. Benny runs right over and shrugs.

Benny Granger: “Out of the way! I got him where I want him!”

-Drew steps back into the second bedroom, while Benny steps up to the open doorway of the first one. Benny waits there, waiting for Michael to appear. As he does, Drew watches and finally gets a chance to reload his rifle (Ching! Cha-ching!). Russ also steps out into the second hallway and over to the railing.

-Benny stands his ground in front of the first bedroom. And finally, Michael appears. He steps up to the doorway and stops. He stares Benny down with his dead-like eyes and breathes heavily. He then starts stepping forward. Benny starts stepping back. Michael continues stepping after Benny. And then, Benny unexpectedly steps to his right towards the stairs. Michael steps forward and stops. He looks over to his left and sees Benny three steps below him.

Benny Granger: “Come on, Michael. Follow me. Forget the others.”

-Michael keeps his Halloween-masked head directed towards Benny. He then looks straight ahead at Drew in the second bedroom. And then, over to Russ in the second hallway. He then steps around and looks down at Benny.

Benny Granger: “That’s right. Eyes on me. I know that you don’t care about us. I happen to know that you only care about your family. And anybody that gets in your way. Well, I’m in your way. I’m in your way right now. And I was the one who rigged every trap in all the rooms. I bet you enjoyed them, huh? They’re waiting for you, Michael. Your family is waiting for you. Well, come on down and see them. I know you want to…”

-Back downstairs, Tommy waits by the entrance to the den. He, as well as the others, can hear Benny trying to tempt Michael.

-Back upstairs, Michael continues keeping his attention on Benny.

Benny Granger: “…I’m right here, Michael. I helped them arrange this reunion, and I helped them rig all the traps. Don’t you want to thank me for my effort? You don’t have to be afraid. I’m not going to shoot you. Not anymore.”

-Benny takes his rifle and sets it on the second floor. He pushes it away and turns back to Michael.

Benny Granger: “You see? I don’t need it. It certainly doesn’t affect you one or another. Come on down. It will be just be you, me and your family. I’ll even leave you alone with them if you wish.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #20  
Old 05-31-2012, 07:13 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 14

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Benny stands his ground and looks up at Michael. For a moment, Michael looks down at Benny. And then, he turns to Drew in the second bedroom. And then over to Russ in the second hallway. Michael looks back down at Benny. He then steps aside and starts walking away from the direction of the stairs. Drew unexpectedly finds Michael stepping towards him. He braces himself and begins raising his rifle. He then witnesses as Michael steps past the second bedroom and turns the corner.

-Benny watches from the stairs as Michael slowly and calmly makes his way down the first hallway. He steps back up from the stairs and looks around. At the same time, Drew steps out of the second bedroom and also looks around. They both watch as Michael steps toward the second hallway.

-Russ, within the second hallway and by the open doorway to the bathroom, watches as Michael steps toward him. He braces himself and raises his rifle. Michael continues making his way down the hallway in a deliberate manner.

-Michael steps to the end of the first hallway and into the second one. As he does, he glances over at Gary in the hallway leading to the right. Gary tenses up. Michael passes Gary and steps over to the hallway leading to the left. Russ steps past the bathroom doorway and keeps the rifle pointed at him. Michael, showing no fear, calmly steps forward. He then steps aside and disappears into the bathroom. And the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down.

-Russ, absolutely stunned, turns to Benny and Drew. He then turns to Gary at the other end of the hallway, who is sighing of relief. Benny and Drew begin walking over to the second hallway. As they do, Russ finally lowers his rifle and steps over to the bathroom doorway. He watches as Michael steps out of the other end of the bathroom and disappears into the back hallway. Benny and Drew walk over.

Benny Granger: “Where did he go?”

Russ Mayer: “To the other end. Towards the last hallway.”

Drew Mackenzie: “What’s he doing? Why is he hiding?”

Benny Granger: “I guess he saw through our plan.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, what now?”

Benny Granger: “If we can’t lure him out, maybe Tommy can.”

Deleted content: Benny goes downstairs to get Tommy and Lindsey is relieved to see him okay. He informs all of them that Milo has been killed. They are well aware. They heard the disturbance on the balcony and can see Milo’s body hanging outside. Benny leads Tommy into the den and Kara is understandably worried about him facing Michael upstairs. Benny also has a word with Tommy. He sighs of frustration and tells him that Milo better not have died in vain. He also informs him that Gary has been injured. Tommy braces himself and walks up to the second floor, while Benny watches from the den.

-Back upstairs, Tommy climbs up from the top step to the second floor. Currently playing is the understated version of the “Halloween” theme. He turns around and sees Russ watching by the bathroom doorway. He then looks to his left and sees Drew in the first bedroom. He also looks to his right and sees Gary in the second bedroom. Tommy looks back in front of him and looks straight ahead. He looks past the second hallway and into the bathroom. He looks beyond the bathroom and into the darkness waiting for him in the back.

-Tommy turns back to Drew and Gary. He then looks back in front of him and starts stepping forward. He begins making his way down the first hallway. As he does, he pulls out the slip of paper with the spell. He looks down at it, then straight ahead.

-Tommy reaches the end of the first hallway and steps into the second one. He walks over to his left and up to the bathroom. As he steps up to the open doorway to the bathroom, Russ begins stepping back. This is where his journey ends and where Tommy’s begins. Russ steps back and allows Tommy to continue forward. Tommy turns to Russ, then bravely steps into the bathroom.

-Tommy begins stepping forward from the bathroom entrance. He begins making his way to the other entrance at the opposite side. As he does, he looks back down at the spell. He reads it over to himself. He looks back up and finds himself approaching the other entrance to the bathroom. He ultimately finds himself approaching the darkness at the other end.

-Tommy steps up to the open doorway of the bathroom. He stops and stands his ground. He braces himself and looks down at the spell. He then faces the darkness in the hallway and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael?”

-For a moment, Tommy stands his ground. And then, Michael appears before him. He steps over from the last hallway. He steps around and faces Tommy. Tommy gulps and faces Michael. Michael stares Tommy down with his dead-like eyes and breathes heavily. Tommy continues facing Michael. He then begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael…feel the power of Thorn…”

-Michael starts stepping forward and Tommy immediately begins stepping back. The understated “Halloween” theme also tones down and the suspenseful version of it takes over.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Michael continues stepping forward, and Tommy continues stepping back.

Tommy Doyle: “…Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment. Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

-Overhearing Tommy chant is Russ in the second hallway.

Russ Mayer: “What in the…?”

-Now waiting at the opposite side of that hallway is Gary. He can also hear Tommy chanting. He turns to Russ in disbelief, and Russ shrugs. Suddenly, they witness as Tommy steps out of the bathroom and into the second hallway.

Tommy Doyle: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo. Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Michael steps out into the hallway next and follows Tommy over to the first hallway. Russ and Gary stay back and allow Tommy to continue his spell. Tommy steps from the second hallway to the first one.

Tommy Doyle: “...Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

-Michael steps into the first hallway and continues stepping after Tommy.

Tommy Doyle: “…Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer. Allow yourself to become consumed by it…”

-Back in the first bedroom, Drew can hear Tommy chanting. He waits by the doorway, ready to fire his rifle if necessary. He also can’t believe what he’s hearing.

Drew Mackenzie: “What is this…?”

-He looks over and sees Gary walking back over to the other doorway to the second bedroom. Gary turns to Drew and shrugs. Tommy continues stepping back down the first hallway. He is approaching the stairs.

Tommy Doyle: “…And continue listening to Wunjo. Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul…”

-Tommy reaches the end of the hallway and starts stepping around for the stairs.

Tommy Doyle: “…And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn. Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and…”

-As Tommy steps around for the stairs, Michael keeps up with him and suddenly reaches across the railing. Tommy shrugs and tries stepping back for the first bedroom to get away. Michael, however, manages to reach him with his right arm (Clench!) and pull him back over to the railing (Thud!).

Tommy Doyle: “…Cancel each of their powers…Argh! Out! Argh! Argh!...”

-Drew watches as Michael reaches over and strangles Tommy also with his left hand (Clench!).

Tommy Doyle: “…Argh! Argh!...”

-With both hands, Michael strangles Tommy (Clench! Clench!).

Tommy Doyle: “…Argh! Argh!...”

-Tommy, losing feeling in his hands, drops the slip of paper. It falls from his hands and floats down to the downstairs. It floats down to the den. Benny looks down at it, then back upstairs. Tommy, unable to finish the chant, looks on in Drew’s direction.

-Drew steps out of the first bedroom and fires his rifle at Michael (Bang!). Michael lets go of Tommy and stumbles back. Tommy grasps the railing and catches his breath, while Drew steps over to the first hallway and fires at Michael again (Bang!). Michael stumbles down the hallway and Drew fires at him some more (Bang! Bang! Bang!).

-Michael stumbles into the second hallway and is suddenly shot at by Russ (Bang!). Michael stumbles back and Russ continues firing at him (Bang! Bang! Bang!).

-Michael stumbles to the right end of the second hallway and is suddenly shot at by Gary from the second bedroom (Bang!). Michael stumbles back into the third bedroom and Gary steps out of the second bedroom. Gary walks right into the third bedroom and continues firing at Michael (Bang! Bang! Bang!).

-Michael stumbles all the way back into the open closet (Thud!) and Gary fires the remaining bullets in his clip at him (Bang! Bang! Bang! Ching!). Michael takes every last one of the shots. He then starts falling forward. He struggles to regain his footing and balance. He finally loses it and falls back. His upper torso slides down to the floor and his legs slide out in front of him. His Halloween-masked head also sags over. And the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down. Gary just stands there and looks on in awe. He then grasps his aching shoulder.

Gary Stamos: “Uhh…”

Director commentary: This is why I liked working with the second floor of the Doyle house. Michael is shot at by a redneck and stumbles down one hallway! Bang, bang, bang! Michael is shot at by another redneck and stumbles down the next hallway! Bang, bang, bang! And finally, Michael is shot at by one more redneck and stumbles into a bedroom! Bang, bang, bang! This sequence could not play out more beautifully!

-Drew, Russ and Tommy run into the third bedroom. Benny runs in after.

Benny Granger: “Did you get him?”

Gary Stamos: “See for yourself.”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think so…”

Gary Stamos: “Are you kidding? How many shots can a man take?”

Tommy Doyle: “He isn’t a man. He’s man possessed by pure evil. You can shoot him as many times as you want. It won’t stop him. It will only slow him down.”

Gary Stamos: “Really? Then, what the hell were you doing in the hallway? Was that supposed to stop him?”

Tommy Doyle: “It almost did. He stopped me before I could finish the chant and free him of the evil.”

-Gary turns to Tommy in disbelief.

Gary Stamos: “Chants? Freeing him of the evil? What evil?...”

-Gary turns to Benny.

Gary Stamos: “…You let Milo to get killed over this bullshit? And you let me get stabbed in the shoulder, too?”

-Benny turns to Gary for a moment, unsure of what to say. Suddenly, that’s when Michael begins picking himself up in the closet and turns his Halloween-masked head to them. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins picking up again.

Gary Stamos: “What? But how?”

Tommy Doyle: “I told you. He isn’t a man.”

-Gary turns to Tommy in disbelief, then back over to Michael. All of them watch as Michael gets up to his knees and stands all the way back up. He steps out of the closet and faces them. He then starts stepping forward. All of them, including Tommy, look in disbelief. Even Tommy thought this many gunshots would be enough to knock Michael out for more than a minute.

-Michael begins closing in on them and Benny shrugs. He aims his rifle at Michael and fires (Bang!). Michael stumbles back and Benny continues firing (Bang! Bang! Bang!). Michael stumbles past the open doors of the bedroom and onto the balcony. Benny steps forward and continues firing (Bang! Bang! Ching!). Michael stumbles all the way to the railing. He grasps the railing behind him and stops himself from falling over. Benny looks down at his rifle, then back over to Michael. His clip is now empty.

-They watch as Michael walks away from the railing and back over to the bedroom. He steps through the open doorway and walks back inside the house. Gary then shrugs and tries firing his rifle at Michael next (Ching!). His clip is also empty.

Gary Stamos: “I’m out.”

-Drew shrugs and tries firing his rifle at Michael next (Bang!). Michael stumbles back and Drew fires at him again (Bang!). Michael stumbles back onto the balcony and Drew tries firing at him once more (Ching!). His clip is also now empty. Michael walks back inside the bedroom and Russ tries firing at him next (Bang!). Michael stumbles back out onto the balcony and Russ fires at him some more (Bang! Bang! Ching!).

-Back outside, the camera follows Michael from above the balcony as he stumbles back to the railing (Thud!) and collapses over it. He falls all the way from the balcony to the front lawn (Thud!). Michael, laying on his back, is motionless. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down. Benny, Drew, Russ, Gary and Tommy run out to the balcony and take a look for themselves. Michael is down. For now.

Deleted content: Back downstairs, the others heard Michael shot over the balcony and fall back out outside. They can see Michael not moving. Then they see Milo’s body being pulled up to the balcony.

-Back on the balcony, Drew and Russ take hold of the chained netting and pull Milo’s lifeless body up to the railing. They take hold of his body and pull him up by his arms. They pull him over the railing and rest his body on the balcony. Drew then unwraps the netting away from his neck. Cut to Milo’s blank point of view as Benny, Drew, Russ, Gary and Tommy look down at him.

Russ Mayer: “What are we going to tell his wife?”

Gary Stamos: “And his kids?”

Drew Mackenzie: “What we’re going to tell his family is that he died a hero. And it’s not going to be bullshit either. He did die a hero. If I didn’t know Milo better, he wouldn’t go out without a fight.”

Benny Granger: “That’s true.”

Russ Mayer: “What you said.”

Gary Stamos: “Amen.”

-They look back over the balcony and still see Michael laying lifelessly on the front lawn. Gary looks on down at Michael, then turns to Tommy.

Gary Stamos: “So, you’re telling me that he is not a man?”

Tommy Doyle: “He isn’t…”

-Tommy turns to Benny.

Tommy Doyle: “…You said that you shot him eighteen times earlier tonight, right?”

Benny Granger: “Right.”

-Tommy turns to the others.

Tommy Doyle: “Well, the rest of you have also shot him by now. He’s been shot at least forty times tonight. One could claim that he’s wearing a protective vest, but he’s also been shot in the neck…”

-Tommy turns back to Benny.

Tommy Doyle: “…Am I right?”

Benny Granger: “Right.”

-Drew, also having shot Michael in the neck, shrugs.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #21  
Old 05-31-2012, 07:22 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 15

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Drew Mackenzie: “Right.”

-Tommy turns to Drew, then turns to all of them.

Tommy Doyle: “It’s up to you to believe what you want. I’m just telling you what I know from my experience. He’s more resilient than any human being. In fact, I’d say that he’s a lot more resilient tonight than he was ten years ago. I don’t know why, but he’s stronger.”

-Moments later…

-Back downstairs, Benny leads Drew, Russ and Tommy out the front door. He steps out under the balcony and the others step out after him. They walk past the balcony and over to Michael’s body. They stop within a few feet of him and look for themselves. Benny then looks up at Gary on the balcony. Gary remained on the balcony and made sure Michael wasn’t going anywhere.

Drew Mackenzie: “He’s still down. He has taken a lot of shots.”

Benny Granger: “And he’s fallen over the balcony twice.”

-Drew turns to Benny, then over to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “How much more can he take?”

Tommy Doyle: “Judging by tonight, I don’t know. But there’s a reason he’s kept coming back all these years. He’s taken a lot of crap before.”

-Suddenly, Michael sits up in a mechanical manner and turns his Halloween-masked head to all four of them. They immediately step further back from him.

Russ Mayer: “You gotta be kidding me…”

-Michael gets to his knees and starts standing back up. They watch as Michael stands all the way back up and faces them. They step further back and below the balcony. Gary, from above it, aims his rifle down toward him (Cha-ching!). Michael looks up at Gary, then back down at the others. He also looks over at Kara, Danny, John and Lindsey in the window.

-Michael then turns his attention back to Benny, Drew, Russ and Tommy. And he begins stepping back. He continues stepping back and turns around. He starts walking down the front lawn and away from the Doyle house. They watch as he steps off the curb and onto the street. He crosses the street and steps up to the other curb. He walks onto the front lawn of the Wallace house and up to the front porch.

-Michael walks onto the front porch and up to the front door of the Wallace house. He then stops and looks back over towards them. He turns his attention back to the door and opens it. He walks in and shuts the door behind him. Everyone at the Doyle house couldn’t be more stunned. Michael has once again retreated. This time to the Wallace house.

Benny Granger: “Let’s get back inside. Now...”

Tommy Doyle: “Yeah…”

-Benny, Drew, Russ and Tommy step back into the Doyle house. Benny shuts the front door and locks it (Click! Chi-ching!). In a moment, Gary steps out of the den and back into the living room. He walks over to Drew and Russ, while Benny walks over to Tommy. He hands him the slip of paper with the spell.

Benny Granger: “You dropped this.”

Tommy Doyle: “Thanks.”

-Both of them look on for a moment. Tommy then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Let me guess. Now you that you’ve seen me in action, you’re starting to doubt me. Right?”

Benny Granger: “No. In fact, I’m more willing to believe you now than I did before. There was a reason he retreated to the other hallway. And there also must be reason why he retreated to Lindsey’s house. He knows what we were trying to do. He still could have tried attacking us, but he didn’t. He only cares about the Strodes. And also you. He’s afraid of you.”

Tommy Doyle: “You’re right. I think he is.”

-Drew, Russ and Gary walk over to them. Drew turns to Benny, then over to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “All right, I need some answers.”

Tommy Doyle: “Ask away.”

Drew Mackenzie: “When you went upstairs, what did you do to lure him out of the back? What were you saying?”

Gary Stamos: “Yeah, what the hell was that?”

Tommy Doyle: “I was reciting a spell. I was using black magic.”

Gary Stamos: “Black magic?”

Tommy Doyle: “I know. It sounds nuts. But believe it or not, I used it on him ten years ago and was able to stop him in his tracks.”

-Kara, Danny and John walk over.

Kara Strode: “It’s true. He saved us that Halloween and protected us from Michael. You have to believe us.”

-Drew, Russ and Gary turn to Kara questionably, then back to Tommy. Drew speaks up.

Drew Mackenzie: “You said you stopped him?”

Tommy Doyle: “Not permanently. It only physically immobilized him. The spell I’ve been trying to recite tonight is supposed to free of him of the evil.”

Gary Stamos: “And what exactly do you mean by that? What evil?”

Tommy Doyle: “I’ve already told you. He isn’t a man. He’s a man possessed by pure evil. It’s been driving him to return to Haddonfield all this time and kill his family. And it also protects him. That’s why he’s kept coming back every Halloween.”

-Drew turns to Tommy, then over to Russ and Gary. All three of them turn to each other questionably. Drew then turns to Benny.

Drew Mackenzie: “What about you? Earlier today, you picked up half a dozen items you don’t normally need to renovate a house. You said that you set traps upstairs. What exactly did you do?”

Benny Granger: “I hooked up sledgehammers in every bedroom and the bathroom. I also hung up the chained netting in the last bedroom.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I can see where you’re going with that. What went wrong?”

Benny Granger: “Michael created a diversion. He turned on one of the lights in Lindsey’s house. We waited for almost an hour. And then, I went over there with John to check it out.”

Tommy Doyle: “And immediately after they left, Michael entered the Doyle house. He fell for the traps and I beat him with a sledgehammer. I then tried reciting the spell. He got up and I wasn’t able to finish. Benny came back and shot the hell out of him.”

Benny Granger: “That’s when I wound up shooting him over the balcony. And when I went to check, he got back up and snuck back into the house. Then, I called you.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I see.”

Benny Granger: “I tried.”

Tommy Doyle: “We both did.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I believe you. Now that he’s back over at Lindsey’s house, what are you thinking of next?”

Benny Granger: “I’m not sure.”

Tommy Doyle: “If you ask me, I think we should be smart about this and think very carefully about our next move.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I agree. And meanwhile, in case he comes back over here, we should plan another trap.”

Benny Granger: “Good thinking. What do you want to do? Re-set the traps upstairs?”

Drew Mackenzie: “No. We don’t need the upstairs. All we need is the living room. And the sledgehammers. All of us will take him by surprise and beat him senseless…”

-Drew turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “…And once he’s incapacitated, you’ll try that spell on him again.”

Gary Stamos: “Are you serious? You’ll let him try that nonsense again?”

-Benny turns to Gary and sighs of frustration.

Benny Granger: “Yes, Gary, we will let him try that nonsense again. When will you open your eyes and open your mind?...”

-Benny turns to other rednecks and prevails.

Benny Granger: “…I don’t know about the rest of you, but I have. God knows how many times all of us have shot him, and he keeps getting back up. The only thing that appears to be affecting him at all is that nonsense Tommy keeps saying to him. Do I personally believe it? No. But I’ve seen it with my own two eyes, and so have the rest of you. The only way I see us stopping him is if we work together. All of us…”

-Benny turns to Tommy.

Benny Granger: “…So, we’ll try it your way and our way. We’ll wait for him. And we’ll plan a new trap.”

Drew Mackenzie: “That’s if he comes back over here. We’ll still wait him out first. And if he stays away, we might have to check Lindsey’s house.”

Benny Granger: “We’ll see.”

Director commentary: So, Benny knows everything but his friends don’t. All they know is that Michael appears to be supernatural in some sense and Tommy can use black magic to stop him. The only one being an asshole about it is Gary. Realistically, he has every right to question what is going on and have difficulty believing Tommy. Not everyone is going to believe in this sort of thing. In the meantime, they wait for Michael’s next move.

-Cut to the neighborhood later on in the mid-evening. The camera pans in on the Wallace house. All the lights remain off. The camera begins panning away from the house and over to the Doyle house across the street. Watching the living room are Benny, Drew, Russ, Gary and Lindsey. Kara and Tommy are in the dining room, while Danny and John are in the den. Danny, grasping a sledgehammer, prevails.

Danny Strode: “…I hope he comes back here. I can’t wait to hit him senseless with this and teach him a lesson.”

John Strode: “I know how you feel. But slow down. We might not need these at all. Tommy and the others might end up finding another way. You don’t want to get your hopes up for nothing.”

Danny Strode: “I guess so.”

John Strode: “Besides, Tommy seems to know what he’s talking about. All I’ve been hearing from him, and also from you, is that nothing has been able stop Michael before. I’m willing to believe that. So, even if you beat him up with that thing, your attempt might be futile.”

-Danny looks on for a moment, then sighs.

Danny Strode: “He stole my childhood. All of them stole my childhood. I already know more than I would care to know about the world and I’m only sixteen. I never got to experience Santa Clause, the Easter Bunny and the Tooth Fairy, and find out that they weren’t real for myself. Finding out that the Boogeyman was real destroyed all of that. It wasn’t just feeling alienated in witness protection that made me feel alone. It was knowing that I was the only kid who knew how dark the world really was. And even if I wanted to warn other kids, how would I be benefitting them? You didn’t know anything until yesterday. You had it easy.”

John Strode: “You think I had it easy? Sure, for several years, I thought I was alone with how little I knew about our family history. Losing my mother wasn’t easy. I was sure it was Michael who killed her. And even if I was right, there was no way to prove it. And nothing I could do about it. It was frustrating. You know what I did to cope with all that? By digging myself into a hole. And I was digging myself deeper into it the last few years. Finding out about you and your family has helped make all of that better. It also comes at a cost…finding out about all the dark stuff. And right now, I’d rather be here than digging myself into a bigger hole at home…where ever home is for that matter. I don’t know anymore.”

Danny Strode: “Neither do I.”

John Strode: “I think we will when this is over.”

-Back in the dining room, Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “...Is it just me, or is Michael stronger than he was ten years ago?”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s not just you. He is more resilient than he’s ever been.”

Kara Strode: “If that’s true, how can we stop him? You’ve tried that spell on him twice already. Are you sure it will actually affect him?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think it will. I just have to recite it without interruption. I also have to recite it in close proximity of Michael…and make sure he doesn’t get to me first. There’s a reason he retreated to Lindsey’s house. Because he knows I can stop him. Because Thorn knows I can free Michael of the evil.”

-Both of them look on for a moment. Kara then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “If Thorn is really listening to you, and is afraid of you…is it possible that Michael is listening as well?”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think so. The whole idea behind Thorn is that it assumes control of Michael’s body and takes away his soul.”

Kara Strode: “Basically, his humanity.”

Tommy Doyle: “Right. His humanity.”

Kara Strode: “Well, is it still there inside him?”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t know. It might be. Why?”

Kara Strode: “If you are able to send a message to Thorn, maybe I can send a message to Michael. Maybe I can reach out to him.”

Tommy Doyle: “It’s an interesting thought, but I don’t think it works that way. Thorn stands for the very essence of evil. You can’t bargain with it.”

Kara Strode: “But what if I can bargain with Michael? If his soul is hidden deep within the evil, it’s still there. If that’s the case, then there is two parts to him. Good and evil. If I can reach out to the good, it might be easier for you to free him of the evil.”

-Tommy turns to Kara for a moment, then speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “That’s a not a bad idea. But it’s dangerous. I wouldn’t want you to get hurt.”

Kara Strode: “Every time you try facing up to Michael, I’m worried about you getting hurt.”

-Tommy turns to Kara for a moment, then sighs.

Tommy Doyle: “Reaching out to Michael isn’t a bad idea. I can see where you’re coming from. You’re a psychologist. It’s only natural for you to try understanding him. But Dr. Loomis was a psychiatrist. He made a career out of trying to reach out to Michael. And look where that got him.”

Kara Strode: “I know. I thought about that as well. And there’s one thing I have in common with Michael that Loomis didn’t. I’m family. And as long as he thinks of me enough to want to kill me, I think he’ll listen.”

Tommy Doyle: “You seem to know what you’re talking about. I have to ask. Now that you have an understanding of Thorn and the cult, what is your diagnosis of Michael?”

Kara Strode: “You want to know? Deep down, he’s a child. He was cursed with an unspeakable evil and he began acting on it when he was six years old. It’s possible that the soul of a child still lives on deep down within him. He was never able to grow up. And he’s scared. He’s scared of the evil surrounding him. Maybe, to understand Thorn, you also have to understand his soul.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s really good thinking.”

Kara Strode: “Well, you’re not alone in this. I actually have the bigger part. He wants nothing but to kill me. As well as Danny and John. And God forbid, Stephen Lloyd. He has to kill all four of us in order to fulfill the prophecy. But he doesn’t have to kill you.”

Tommy Doyle: “Not necessarily. As long as I know all about the cult, I’m sure Thorn has a target on me as well. And as long as he’s after all of us, I want to be the one up close and personal with Michael. He knows that I can stop him.”

Kara Strode: “Maybe I can as well. What if I tried reaching out to him, and also recited the spell?”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t know…”

TO BE CONTINUED TOMORROW...
Reply With Quote
  #22  
Old 05-31-2012, 08:18 PM
Yeah, I totally remember those 'Helloween' rumors! I like to give myself credit as being a little solid in the imagination/creative departments, but I definitely am not too sure on how I would personally aim at that storyline. That is a tough one, off the top of my head the only two things I could link are Thorn with the Hellraiser world.

I never have put up much (if any) fan-fiction, I mostly just toy with them in my mind when bored or such. Eventually, with my aspirations to dish out some writing of my own it seems more logical to focus on those ventures than fan-fiction that the people behind all legal rights & entities would likely just discard immediately and such. In a dreamland, if I were to be able to gain momentum from original writing ideas I would push the ideas possibly, but that's my own little fantasy world going off the rocker.

One thing I can agree with on your end : Lindsey Wallace is a character worth revisiting and furthering. The one comic of Halloween I read dealing with her being a newsreporter coming back to Haddonfield and eventually meeting up with Brackett was top notch. I always felt it would've been something awesome to go towards post-Halloween Resurrection to put some life back into the franchise. (and then came those Rob Zombie flicks).

Last edited by XCoRyX; 05-31-2012 at 08:21 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #23  
Old 06-02-2012, 02:14 PM
The most recently extended commercial interruption has been paid for in part by the gods of thunder and tornadoes, having embarked on a rather fun rampage in the last day.

You're exactly right, Cory. Thorn, as associated with the Druids, and the Hellraiser world. They are similiar but separate religions or dark sanctuaries. And the connection is a "Halloween" character with the right motivation to get their hands on the puzzle box. It actually works for the H6 and H20 storylines. I started working on the H20 version after finishing the H6 version, but stopped abruptly. The flame driving me to keep writing fan-fiction finally burned out.

If you remember the "Helloween" rumor, you might also remember the silly "Horror Talk" series I began working on in 2003. I was just out of high school, free of all the nonsense, was anticipating FvJ at the end of summer, and discovered that I was a natural at writing fan-fiction. I was an amateur in the beginning, my writing abilities would expand over the years, and I would have to wait before I was ready to finally tackle the "Halloween" sequels I dreamt about. When I started with "Horror Talk," I no longer felt like a loser who wasn't good at anything. That was my reason for beginning and continuing the fan-fiction for so long, or too long. That is what drove me to do this.

Before writing H9 in 2009, I wrote and posted two other sequels in 2008. One of them followed up on "Halloween: Resurrection," and featured John Strode, Lindsey Wallace and former sherif Leigh Brackett (as well as the redneck characters featured in H9). There is something fun about expanding on former characters from the prior films. And If I was able to write a proper sequel to "Halloween: Resurrection," (without Laurie Strode and Dr. Loomis), so could have the studio. But they went their own way.
Reply With Quote
  #24  
Old 06-02-2012, 02:25 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 16

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Deleted content: Michael turns on a light at the Wallace house again and invites them to another game of hide-and-seek. This time, Tommy has no clue what Michael as in store for them. It could be another diversion or it might not be. Benny decides that he and Tommy will check Lindsey’s house. Russ joins them and Kara insists that she go too. She really wants to reach out to Michael. Naturally, the others prefer they stay. They don’t want them walking into greater danger. But they have to do something.

Deleted content: This time, we follow their journey to the Wallace house and inside it. I don’t suggest that it is another diversion. Michael may actually be there this time. They enter through the back kitchen door. Kara and Tommy wait in the kitchen, while Benny and Russ check the basement and the entire ground floor. When they don’t find Michael and have to look on the second floor, Tommy suggests that he call Michael from the stairs. Michael will have to hear him and he will have to respond. Then, Kara suggests that she call Michael from the stairs instead. Tommy agrees and the others stand by to shoot Michael if necessary.

Deleted content: Kara steps nearly to the top of the stairs and calls out for Michael. Then, she recites the spell. She finishes the spell and Michael doesn’t make his presence known. Tommy steps up to Kara and also calls out for Michael. He begins reciting the spell and then sighs of frustration. Clearly, Michael is not there. It is another diversion. They have to get back to the Doyle house immediately.

-Cut back to the Doyle house moments earlier. Cut to the point of view of a mysterious figure approaching the back kitchen door. Heavy breathing is heard. He/she steps up to the door and looks through the window. He/she sees Drew watching the dining room and looking out the front window. As Drew begins turning his attention over to the kitchen, he/she steps out of sight.

-Back inside, Drew steps into the kitchen and watches it for a moment. He then steps back into the dining room. He turns to Gary in the living room, then looks out the front window.

-Back outside, the mysterious figure momentarily steps back over to the door. A right hand reaches for the doorknob and begins turning it. Unexpectedly, it does not turn all the way. It is now locked. The hand lets go of the knob and pulls back. He/she looks back up through the window. And he/she quickly steps out of sight as Drew turns his attention over to the kitchen.

-The mysterious figure breathes heavily and waits momentarily. He/she then steps back over to the door. He/she looks down at the doorknob, then inside to see Drew stepping back into the dining room. He/she looks back down at the doorknob. And suddenly, his/her hand reaches forward and punches through the window (Smash! Shatter!).

-Back inside, Drew shrugs and looks back into the kitchen. He then turns to Russ and signals him.

-Back in the den, Danny, John and Lindsey turn to each other and brace themselves it. Each of them immediately grabs their sledgehammers.

-Back outside, the mysterious figure unlocks the back door (Click! Chi-ching!). He/she then looks back up to see Drew stepping out of sight. The mysterious figure pulls his/her bloody hand back and begins pulling the door open. He/she then lets go of the door and begins stepping away from it.

-Back inside, Drew and Gary wait by the corner in the dining room with sledgehammers. They wait a moment and brace themselves. Drew then peeks his head out and looks into the kitchen. All he sees is the back door hanging open. But he doesn’t see Michael. He turns to Gary and shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “He’s not coming.”

-Drew looks around the corner again and still doesn’t see Michael. He then turns back to Gary.

Drew Mackenzie: “Dammit, he’s retreating again.”

Gary Stamos: “Well, let me get him. As long as he wants in, I’ll make sure he gets our invitation.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Gary, you don’t have to.”

Gary Stamos: “I want to. After he stabbed me in the shoulder, he’s got another thing coming.”

-Gary puts the sledgehammer down and picks up his rifle. He looks around the corner and sees the back door hanging open. He then steps out from the corner and bravely steps into the kitchen. He slowly steps forward and begins speaking up.

Gary Stamos: “Well, where are ya? I know you’re there. You kindly invited us over to your party across the street and we didn’t come. Instead, we planned our own party and neglected to tell you about it. Well, if you really want in that badly, you’re invited.”

-Gary approaches the back doorway and stops within three feet. He hears nothing but the wind. He also feels the cold. He stands his ground and braces himself. He then points his rifle forward and bravely starts stepping forward. He points the rifle up to the door and pushes it further open. As Gary slowly steps up to the open doorway, he tenses up. He then shrugs and finally steps outside. And before he can point the rifle in any direction, Michael immediately takes hold of him (Clench! Clench!).

Gary Stamos: “Hey!”

-Gary drops his rifle (Cha-ching!) and Michael slams him against the wall (Thud!).

Gary Stamos: “Argh!”

-Michael stops and pulls his hands from Gary’s shoulders to his head (Clench! Clench!). Wasting no time, he slams Gary back into the wall once more (Thud!). Gary is instantly knocked out. Michael lets him go and Gary slides down to the ground (Thud!).

-Back inside, Drew shrugs and looks around the corner.

Drew Mackenzie: “Gary?”

-Dead silence.

Drew Mackenzie: “Gary!”

-More dead silence. Drew sighs.

Drew Mackenzie: “Gary…”

-Drew steps back and looks over into the living room. He then looks back into the kitchen. He stands his ground for a moment, unsure of what to do. He then sighs and puts the sledgehammer down. He picks up his rifle and starts stepping forward.

-Drew approaches the kitchen entrance and braces himself. He passes the entrance and steps into the kitchen. He slowly steps away from the entrance and further into the kitchen. He makes his way into the middle of the kitchen and tenses up. He continues stepping forward and further up to the back doorway. He approaches the doorway and stops within three feet of it. He stands his ground and tenses up big time. He looks out at the darkness waiting for him outside. He then shrugs and begins stepping forward.

-And suddenly, Michael walks in and reaches for Drew. Drew immediately tries firing his rifle, but Michael reaches over and swipes it from him with his left hand (Cha-ching!). And with his right hand, he reaches for Drew’s throat (Clench!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh!”

-Michael places the rifle over on the kitchen counter. With his left hand now free, he reaches for Drew’s throat (Clench!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh!”

-With both hands, Michael proceeds to strangle Drew (Clench! Clench!).

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh! Argh!”

-As Michael continues to strange Drew, he shows no mercy in his dead-like eyes.

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael continues to strangle Drew until he passes out.

Drew Mackenzie: “Argh! Argh…”

-Drew begins falling to his knees. Michael kneels down and then lets him go. Drew falls back (Thud!) and is out cold. So is Gary. Michael had no time to kill them. He knows that he has a short window to kill Danny and John before Tommy and the others realize that he isn’t across the street. Thorn could not be more determined, as well as desperate, to finally kill off the Strodes and live up to its destiny.

-Back in the den, Danny, John and Lindsey wait anxiously.

Danny Strode: “I don’t hear anything.”

John Strode: “I haven’t heard anything for a while.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Where are they?”

-They look out into the living room for a moment. And suddenly, Michael steps out of the dining room and into the living room. They immediately duck back and Lindsey shrugs.

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh my gosh!”

John Strode: “Shh…”

-Michael looks around the living room. Here he is once again. And this time, Tommy isn’t there. He turns his Halloween-masked head to the den. He begins stepping over to it and the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing.

-Back in the den, John silently speaks up.

John Strode: “We can’t stay here! We have to go upstairs! Come on!”

-John begins leading Danny and Lindsey over to the stairs.

Lindsey Wallace: “I can’t believe this!”

-Back in the living room, Michael continues stepping towards the den. He approaches the entrance. He steps within three feet of it. He walks on through the entrance and looks around the den. Nobody is there. He then turns his Halloween-masked head to the stairs.

-Back on the second floor, John leads Danny and Lindsey down the first hallway. He leads them into the second hallway and Lindsey shrugs.

Lindsey Wallace: “He’s coming for us! What are we going to do? Hide in the back and wait for him?”

-John looks through both open doorways of the bathroom and into the darkness facing them on the other side. He then turns back to Danny and Lindsey.

John Strode: “No. No, I have a better idea. Come on…”

-Back in the den, Michael walks up to the stairs. He climbs up onto the first step and begins ascending to the second floor. He climbs all the way up and onto the second floor. He then turns around and looks around the hallway. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down and the understated version takes over.

-Michael looks over at the first bedroom to his left. He then looks over to the second bedroom to his right. And then, he looks over at the second hallway. He’s played hide-and-seek twice so far tonight. He’d rather not play it anymore.

-Finally, Michael turns his attention to the first bedroom. He walks on in and heads straight for the open closet. He steps up to the closet and looks inside. Nobody is there. One room down, five to go.

-Michael steps out of the first bedroom and back into the first hallway. He walks over to the second bedroom. He walks on in and heads straight for the open closet. He steps up to the closet and looks inside. Nobody is there. Two rooms down, four to go.

-Michael then steps back and turns his Halloween-masked head to the other doorway. He walks right over to it and looks straight ahead into the third bedroom. He then looks out to the hallway to his left. Nobody is there. However, he unexpectedly turns around and insists on walking out of the same doorway he came in.

-Michael steps out of the second bedroom and back into the first hallway. He looks down the hallway and begins stepping forward. He makes his way down it and approaches the second hallway. Michael walks into the second hallway and steps into the right direction. He walks on into third bedroom and heads straight for the open closet. He steps up to it and looks inside. Nobody is there. He then steps back and looks over towards the balcony.

-Michael turns around and starts stepping towards the balcony. He makes his way towards the open entrance. He approaches the balcony and continues stepping forward. Michael steps out from the third bedroom and onto the balcony. And immediately, he is struck in the chest with a sledgehammer from the far side (Thwonk!). The understated “Halloween” theme tones and the suspenseful version takes over.

-Michael stumbles back and is struck from the opposite side of the balcony with another sledgehammer (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back to the other side and is struck with a third sledgehammer (Thwonk!). John shrugs.

John Strode: “We got him! Keep hitting him!”

-Michael stumbles back to the opposite side of the balcony and towards Danny. Danny strikes him again (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back towards John and Lindsey. John strikes Michael again (Thwonk!) and he stumbles back towards Danny. Danny strikes Michael once more (Thwonk!) and he stumbles back towards John and Lindsey. And this time, it is Lindsey’s turn to strike him (Thwonk!).

-Michael continues stumbling back and forth between the three of them. Between Danny and John (Thwonk! Thwonk!). Between Danny and Lindsey (Thwonk! Thwonk!). Between Danny and John (Thwonk! Thwonk!). Between Danny and Lindsey (Thwonk!). And between Danny and John (Thwonk! Thwonk!).

-As Michael stumbles back over to Danny, Danny strikes him with his sledgehammer (Thwonk!). And then, as Michael stumbles back, Danny unexpectedly follows after him. John and Lindsey step aside as they witness Danny prevail and strike the sledgehammer at Michael again (Thwonk!).

-Michael stumbles back and Danny strikes him once more (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back to the railing (Thud!) and Danny strikes him once again (Thwonk!). Danny, not stopping for a second, strikes Michael one more time (Thwonk!). He strikes Michael one last time (Thwonk!). And then, he strikes Michael one extra time (Thwonk!).

-Michael, grasping the railing, has had enough. As Danny swings his sledgehammer back (Swish!), Michael lets go of the railing and collapses to the floor (Thud!). The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down.

Lindsey Wallace: “Danny, you did it!”

-Danny, with the sledgehammer still swung back, is caught in the moment. Michael, laying down on his chest, is motionless.

John Strode: “Danny?”

-Danny wakes out of it and finally lowers the sledgehammer.

Danny Strode: “Uh, yeah…I got him…”

John Strode: “Now, let’s wait for the others.”

Lindsey Wallace: “We don’t have to. I can call Benny. Now that it’s safe for me to call them…”

-Suddenly, Michael’s arms reach out in front of him and he pulls himself up. He then turns his Halloween-masked head up towards them, particularly Danny.

Danny Strode: “No! No way!”

-Danny shrugs and swings the sledgehammer over Michael’s back (Thwonk!). Michael falls back down (Thud!) and Danny strikes Michael again (Thwonk!). John stays back with Lindsey and braces himself. Michael won’t stay down for even a minute. He then takes notice of the chained netting wrapped around the railing.

-As Danny strikes Michael once more (Thwonk!), John looks back at the chained netting again. He then shrugs and runs over to it. He takes hold of the other end of it (Clench! Clench!) and pulls it over to Michael (Ching! Cha-ching!). He stops and turns to Danny.

John Strode: “Danny, watch out!”

-Danny, with the sledgehammer swung back, stops for a moment. With Michael down, John reaches down and starts wrapping the chained netting around Michael’s neck (Ching! Cha-ching!). Suddenly, both of Michael’s arm reach up for John’s throat (Clench! Clench!).

John Strode: “Argh!”

Lindsey Wallace: “John!”

Danny Strode: “No!”

-Danny shrugs and strikes Michael with the sledgehammer (Thwonk!). Michael, still holding onto John, prevails.

John Strode: “Argh! Argh!”

-Danny strikes Michael again (Thwonk!). Michael, still not letting go of John, continues to prevail.

John Strode: “Argh! Argh!”

-Danny strikes Michael once more (Thwonk!). Finally, Michael’s arms give out. John falls back (Thud!) and catches his breath. Danny strikes Michael once again (Thwonk!), while Lindsey runs to John’s aid.

Lindsey Wallace: “John!”

John Strode: “I’m okay…I’m okay…”

-Danny strikes Michael one more time (Thwonk!). Lindsey turns to Danny, then over to Michael. She turns back to Danny and shrugs.

Lindsey Wallace: “Danny, wait!”

-Just as Danny is about to swing the sledgehammer back, he lowers it. Wasting no time, Lindsey runs over to Michael to finish the job John started. She wraps the chain around Michael’s neck and into a loop (Ching! Cha-ching!). She immediately steps away and Michael reaches for her. He misses Lindsey and begins pulling himself back up. Not giving him a chance, Danny shrugs and strikes him with the sledgehammer (Thwonk! Thud!).

John Strode: “Danny, let him get up first!”

-Danny, still in the moment, turns to John questionably. He then steps back and waits for Michael to get back up. For a moment, he is motionless. And then, his arms suddenly reach out and pull him up from the floor. He gets to his knees and starts standing back up. Danny watches as Michael stands all the way back up. Michael, at first, faces Danny. He then reaches for the chained netting wrapped around his neck. Danny shrugs and swings the sledgehammer at his chest (Thwonk!).

Danny Strode: “Die!”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #25  
Old 06-02-2012, 02:33 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 17

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Michael stumbles back and Danny follows. He strikes Michael again (Thwonk!).

Danny Strode: “Die!”

-Michael stumbles back and Danny strikes him one more time (Thwonk!).

Danny Strode: “Die!”

-Michael stumbles back into the railing (Thud!) and Danny strikes him once again (Thwonk!).

Danny Strode: “Just die already!”

-Michael holds onto the railing (Clench! Clench!) and Danny strikes him one more time (Thwonk!). Danny strikes Michael one last time (Thwonk!) and he continues to hold onto the railing for dear life. Danny swings the sledgehammer back to strike Michael one extra time (Swish!).

-And this time, Michael catches it (Clench!). He catches the hard end of it with his right hand and swipes it from Danny (Cha-ching!). He then tosses it aside (Cha-ching!) and begins stepping towards Danny. Danny, beginning to step back, gulps. Suddenly, that’s when Lindsey prevails and strikes Michael with her sledgehammer (Thwonk!). Michael stumbles back into the railing (Thud!). And then, John finishes the job and strikes Michael in the head with his sledgehammer (Thwonk!).

-Michael collapses backwards. He falls over the railing and from the balcony. The chained netting recoils (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!) and Michael is left hanging within a few feet from the front lawn. At first, Michael shows signs of a struggle. And then, he starts to lose the battle. His Halloween-masked head sags over, while his arms and legs go limp. Danny steps up to the railing and looks over. So does John and Lindsey.

John Strode: “Step back. You better watch yourself…”

-Danny steps back. All three of them, standing within a foot of the railing, look over the balcony.

Lindsey Wallace: “We got him.”

Danny Strode: “For now…”

-They step away from the railing and over to the third bedroom.

John Strode: “I really want to think that, that is enough to stop him. But I don’t think it is…”

-John turns to Danny.

John Strode: “…Not according to you and Tommy.”

Danny Strode: “It isn’t.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Then, I’m calling Benny right now while he’s still hanging.”

-Lindsey pulls out her cell phone. And suddenly, she hears the rattling of a chain (Ching! Cha-ching!). All three of them look over towards the railing. The first thing they see is the chained netting swinging around. The next thing they see is each of Michael’s hands reaching for the edge of the balcony (Clench! Clench!). As they watch him climb up the railing, they tense up. Danny shrugs.

Danny Strode: “Nothing can stop him. Not even for a minute.”

-Michael pulls his upper torso up to the railing. While still on the outside, he looks over to others. He then releases his left hand and loosens up the chained netting around his neck (Ching! Cha-ching! Ching!). He drops it back on the balcony (Cha-chi-i-i-i-ing!) and begins pulling up his lower torso.

-As Michael climbs all the way up and lifts his right leg over the railing, the others begin stepping back. As Michael lifts his left leg over the railing, they step back into the third bedroom.

-Standing firmly back on the balcony, Michael begins stepping after them. They step further back into the third bedroom. As they step back towards the open doorway, Michael steps out from the balcony and into the third bedroom. They step out of the third bedroom and out into the second hallway. As they do, Danny shrugs.

Danny Strode: “My sledgehammer.”

John Strode: “Here, take mine.”

-John hands Danny his sledgehammer. He then pulls out the knife Benny gave him and pulls open the blade (Shing!). They step into the middle of the second hallway and over towards the first one. That’s when John stops in his tracks. Danny and Lindsey turn to him questionably.

John Strode: “Look, nothing is going to stop him from coming after us. So, let’s lure him downstairs to the living room. We’ll attack him down there.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Then, I’ll finally call Benny and tell them to get back here.”

John Strode: “No, don’t. Michael is afraid of Tommy. If he knows he’s coming, he’ll hide again. Let’s just lure Michael downstairs and wait for them. We beat him up before. We can beat him up again.”

Danny Strode: “I like it. Let’s do it.”

Lindsey Wallace: “All right.”

-Suddenly, Michael steps out of the third bedroom. He steps out into the second hallway and turns his Halloween-masked head towards them. He begins stepping forward and the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing. As the others step back into the first hallway, John silently speaks up.

John Strode: “If you can, show your fear. If we look too brave, he might suspect we’re onto something.”

-As they step further back down the first hallway, Michael steps around from the second one. He also pulls out his kitchen knife (Shi-i-i-i-ing). Danny and Lindsey both tense up.

Danny Strode: “I don’t have to pretend.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Neither do I.”

-They step back to the end of the first hallway and around to the stairs. Michael continues making his way down the first hallway. They step down from the second floor and begin climbing down the stairs. As they do, Michael approaches the end of the first hallway.

Danny Strode: “He’s coming.”

-They, stepping backwards and looking up, watch as Michael makes it to the end of the hallway. He steps around to the stairs as they step down to the ground floor. Michael stands his ground on the second floor and looks down at them. He then climbs down to the first step. He climbs down to the second step and continues descending from the second floor.

-At the same time, the others finally arrive back to the house. Kara, Tommy, Benny and Russ run into the den. So do Drew and Gary. Michael climbs down to the fourth step from the top and stops in his tracks. He remains where he is and looks down at all nine of them. He then starts stepping back up to the second floor. As he does, Tommy mutters to himself.

Tommy Doyle: “Dammit.”

-Michael steps away from the stairs and down the first hallway. He stops and looks back down at them over the railing. He then continues down the first hallway and disappears out of sight. The suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down. Benny turns to Danny, John and Lindsey.

Benny Granger: “Are you guys okay?”

Lindsey Wallace: “We’re fine.”

-Russ turns to Drew and Gary.

Russ Mayer: “You guys were lucky. He could have killed you.”

Gary Stamos: “You can count me in twice. First my shoulder, now my head…”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m surprised he didn’t kill us. He put me to sleep with a choke hold, but he easily could have broken my neck if he tried.”

John Strode: “I know the feeling…”

-John turns to Tommy.

John Strode: “…He obviously cares more about killing us than the rest of you.”

Gary Stamos: “That’s comforting to know…”

-Tommy turns to Gary, then back to John.

Tommy Doyle: “Not just the three of you. He also wants to kill me. But he’s afraid of me. He expected me to come to the conclusion that he wouldn’t make the same mistake twice, and he created another diversion. That’s exactly what he did. But at least you’re all okay.”

Gary Stamos: “Sure. If you call a splitting headache okay.”

-Tommy looks back upstairs. All nine of them look upstairs and Benny speaks up.

Benny Granger: “Well, we seem to have him where we want him. Again.”

Tommy Doyle: “Or, does he have us where he wants us instead?”

Kara Strode: “As long as we know he’s up there, this could be my opportunity to try reaching out to him.”

Tommy Doyle: “I agree…”

Deleted content: Benny also agrees to Kara reaching out to Michael upstairs. They are running out of ideas; they have to do something. Naturally, the rednecks will go up there with her and protect her if necessary. Gary also shows his true colors and acts like an asshole again. He doesn’t know how to believe any of it. Tommy and the rednecks try to get through to him, and he gives in. He can go along with their next plan, but it doesn’t mean he has to like it. Finally, Kara and the rednecks begin making their way upstairs.

-Drew momentarily approaches the second floor. He steps up from the stairs and begins walking around to the first hallway. As he does, he points his rifle at the open doorway to the second bedroom. He safely steps into the middle of the first hallway and stops. Russ steps up from the stairs next and walks around to the first hallway.

-Next up is Kara. She steps from up stairs and begins walking around to the first hallway. As she does, Drew and Russ watch her back. They keep their rifles pointed at the open doorway to the second bedroom. Kara safely steps into the middle of the first hallway and over to Drew and Russ. Next up are Benny and Gary. Benny steps up from the stairs and safely walks back into the first hallway. So does Gary.

-All five of them stand within the first hallway and brace themselves. Drew and Russ keep their attention on the second hallway, while Benny and Gary keep their attention on the first two bedrooms. Kara looks both ways, then pulls out the slip of paper. She looks down at the spell written on it and momentarily begins chanting.

Kara Strode: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn…”

-The others immediately begin looking around for Michael.

Kara Strode: “…Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel. Thorn believes in you…”

-The others continue watching for Michael and still don’t see him. Kara also watches for Michael. She turns to Drew and Russ and begins stepping forward. They begin stepping towards to the second hallway, allowing her to make full use of the floor. Benny and Gary follow.

Kara Strode: “…It wishes to free you of your torment. Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

-Drew and Russ step around into the second hallway. As they do, they point their rifles in both directions. Michael isn’t there. Each of them step aside and allow Kara into the second hallway.

Kara Strode: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo. Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel. Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

-Suddenly, Michael steps out from the third bedroom and into the second hallway. He steps around and turns his Halloween-masked head to Kara. He immediately begins stepping towards her, Drew and Russ. They step further back into the second hallway and past the open doorway to the bathroom. As they do, Drew turns to Benny and Gary over in the first hallway. Benny and Gary both shrug and point their rifles directly ahead for Michael (Cha-ching! Cha-ching!). Kara continues chanting as Michael quickly approaches her and the others.

Kara Strode: “…Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer. Allow yourself to become consumed by it. And continue listening to Wunjo…”

-Michael closely steps up to Kara, Drew and Russ. Realizing he’s closing in, she stops in her tracks and puts the slip of paper away.

Kara Strode: “…Michael, stop!”

-Michael, within an arms length of Kara, immediately stops in his tracks. He turns to her. He then turns his attention to Drew and Russ behind her. He also looks over to Benny and Gary in the other hallway. He then turns back to Kara. He breathes heavily and stares her down with his dead-like eyes. Kara bravely faces him and begins speaking up.

Kara Strode: “Michael? Michael, it’s okay. You don’t have to be afraid. For most of your whole life, you’ve been living in darkness. Then again, for all I know, you could have been living in it since you were born…”

-Michael looks on at Kara and listens to her.

Kara Strode: “…You could have realized it was there from the very beginning and feared what it wanted with you. Almost like you were you hearing voices in your head. If you did, it must have been terrifying.”

-Michael suddenly grasps his Halloween-masked head with both hands as if something is stirred up inside him. He then turns away from Kara and begins stepping back. Kara stands her ground and continues.

Kara Strode: “I want you to know something. I don’t blame you. Not for my mother, not for my father, not for my brother, and not for Jamie Lloyd. That’s if it was you who killed her…”

-Michael steps back to the right end of the second hallway. He steps back towards the open doorways to the second and third bedrooms. Kara begins stepping forward to keep up with him. Drew and Russ step up behind Kara to also keep up with her.

Kara Strode: “…If there’s anyone or anything I blame, it’s Thorn. I know by now that Thorn is responsible for your actions. And I know that you must feel all alone in there.”

-Michael steps back towards the doorway of the second bedroom and disappears inside. Kara cautiously steps to the end of the hallway. She steps up to the second bedroom and sees Michael waiting for her a few feet beyond the doorway. She begins stepping forward and Michael begins stepping back. At the same time, Drew and Russ keep up with Kara and watch her back. Drew turns to Benny and Gary, and they step over to the other doorway to the second bedroom.

Kara Strode: “But you’re really not alone. I feel for you. You’ve had no control over your life. And you need someone to help you fight back against the evil…”

-Kara continues stepping forward and Michael continues stepping back. Drew and Russ step up to the doorway and remain there. They watch every move between Kara and Michael.

Kara Strode: “…Michael, if you can, listen to me. Whatever the darkness is doing to torment you, try to ignore it and fight back. Fight back against the evil. Fight back against Thorn. Fight back against them…”

-Michael steps back to the other doorway and Kara continues keeping up with him.

Kara Strode: “… It’s taken over your whole life. It’s robbed you of your innocence and humanity. And it doesn’t have to stay that way. You can still take your life back before it’s too late…”

-Back in the first hallway, Benny and Gary watch as Michael steps out of the second bedroom and back towards the first one. They also watch as Kara steps out into the hallway next. At the same time, Drew and Russ step around from the second hallway.

Kara Strode: “…Don’t let Thorn win. Fight it. Fight back. Fight back for me. Fight back for Danny. Fight back for John. Fight back for Tommy. And if it’s not too late, fight back for Stephen Lloyd…”

-Michael steps back into the first bedroom. Kara keeps up with him and cautiously steps towards the doorway. Seeing Michael three feet beyond the doorway, she stops in her tracks and continues. Michael stops in his tracks and faces her.

Kara Strode: “…Fight back for all the extra people who don’t need to be sacrificed for nothing. And fight back for all the others who have already been sacrificed. Prevent their deaths from meaning nothing. You can’t take back what happened to them, but you can prevent their deaths from being in vain.”

-Kara stops and faces Michael. Michael faces her. She then speaks up again.

Kara Strode: “Michael?”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #26  
Old 06-02-2012, 02:44 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 18

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Suddenly, Michael reaches for his Halloween-masked head again. He steps back and shakes it as if an inner-struggle is taking place.

Kara Strode: “Michael, go ahead and fight back. Fight back against Thorn. Fight back against the evil.”

-Kara watches as Michael continues grasping his head. Seeing an opportunity, she pulls out the slip of paper and begins chanting again.

Kara Strode: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn. Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Michael continues grasping his head.

Kara Strode: “Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment. Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

-Michael continues grasping his head.

Kara Strode: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo…”

-Michael suddenly lets go of his Halloween-masked head. He turns to Kara and begins stepping forward. Kara stands her ground and continues chanting.

Kara Strode: “…Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Michael closely approaches Kara. Kara wisely begins stepping away from the first bedroom and away from Michael.

Kara Strode: “…Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

-Kara steps further away from the first bedroom and Michael steps out of it.
Kara Strode: “…Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer…”

-Michael steps back into the first hallway and after Kara. Kara, trying to finish the chant, quickly steps back into the second bedroom to create enough distance from Michael – but also enough distance to keep Michael in her proximity.

Kara Strode: “…Allow yourself to become consumed by it. And continue listening to Wunjo…”

-Michael steps up to doorway of the second bedroom and stops. He faces Kara. And Kara bravely faces Michael.

Kara Strode: “…Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul…”

-Michael unexpectedly turns his Halloween-masked head to Benny and Gary in first hallway. He steps around and starts stepping towards them. Upon seeing Michael disappear from her sight, Kara steps back into the hallway.

Kara Strode: “…And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn…”

-Michael closely approaches Benny and Gary. Both of them try to step back far enough for Kara’s benefit. Drew and Russ watch from the second hallway as Michael steps after Benny and Gary in the first hallway.

Russ Mayer: “Do you see what he’s doing? He won’t let her finish the spell. He’s trying to create another diversion.”

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s not over yet…”

Kara Strode: “…Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and…”

-Michael quickly steps up to Benny and Gary. And Gary and Benny find themselves meeting up with Drew and Russ in the second hallway. Michael reaches out to them with both hands. Benny and Gary then turn to each other and find themselves with no other choice. They point their rifles at Michael and fire (Bang! Bang!).

Kara Strode: “…Cancel each of their powers out, and…”

-Kara, finding the chant being interrupted, sighs of frustration.

Kara Strode: “…Dammit.”

-Back downstairs, Tommy hears the shots and knows it didn’t work out. He also sighs of frustration.

Tommy Doyle: “Dammit.”

-Back upstairs, Benny and Gary continue firing their rifles at Michael (Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang!). Kara quickly ducks back into the second bedroom as Michael stumbles into the far wall (Thud!). He looks straight ahead at Benny and Gary. He then turns to Kara.

-Suddenly, Kara sees him taking extra shots (Bang! Bang!). She watches as Michael stumbles down the wall and into the first bedroom. She also watches as Gary steps around the stairs and fires into the first bedroom (Bang! Bang! Ching!). Michael stumbles further back into the first bedroom and disappears out of sight. Gary stands his ground and prevails.

Gary Stamos: “That’s right! How did you like that?? Huh??”

-Gary then grasps his aching shoulder.

Gary Stamos: “Uhh…”

-He looks down at the empty clip in his rifle. Finally, he turns to Kara in the second bedroom.

Gary Stamos: “You okay?”

-Kara, floored by his performance, shrugs

Kara Strode: “I’m fine…”

Gary Stamos: “Good…”

-Benny walks over and turns to Gary.

Benny Granger: “Nice firing.”

Gary Stamos: “Well, he asked for it.”

Benny Granger: “He sure did.”

-Benny turns to Kara.
Benny Granger: “It was a nice try. It looked like he was intimidated by you.”

Kara Strode: “He was. I got through to him and stirred up the good. But the evil overcame it.”

Benny Granger: “I’m willing to believe that. I saw it with my own eyes.”

Gary Stamos: “So did I. There’s something really fucked up about him.”

Kara Strode: “Just like before, he created another diversion. He made sure the spell was interrupted.”

Benny Granger: “Yes, he did.”

-Benny turns back to Gary, then looks over to the first bedroom. Gary empties his rifle (Ching!) and reloads it with a new clip (Cha-ching!). Drew and Russ walk over and also watch the first bedroom. Benny turns to them, then over to Kara.

Benny Granger: “All right. We got him narrowed down to a single bedroom. I say you lure him out. We’ll stay back and make sure he can’t reach any of us to create another diversion. But we’ll stay close enough to make sure he doesn’t touch you. You up to it?”

Kara Strode: “I am.”

-Benny turns to Drew, Russ and Gary.

Benny Granger: “What about the rest of you?”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m ready.”

Russ Mayer: “So am I.”

Gary Stamos: “Let’s get the fucker.”

Benny Granger: “That’s the spirit. Let’s do this.”

-Benny, Drew, Russ and Gary walk down the first hallway and step into the second one. Kara remains in the second bedroom. She then steps out it and into the first hallway. As she does, the understated “Halloween” theme begins playing. She looks straight ahead into the first bedroom, then looks over at the others in the second hallway. She turns her attention back to the first bedroom and begins stepping towards it.

-Kara steps forward and approaches the stairs. She passes the stairs and approaches the open doorway of the first bedroom. She steps within a foot of the doorway and stops. She then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “Michael?”

-Dead silence. She speaks up again.

Kara Strode: “Michael!”

-More dead silence. She turns to the others in the second hallway. She then turns her attention back to the first bedroom. She looks inside, then looks down at the slip of paper with the spell. She looks back inside the bedroom and begins chanting.

Kara Strode: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn…”

-Back downstairs, Tommy mutters to himself.

Tommy Doyle: “You can do it…”

-Back upstairs, Kara continues chanting.

Kara Strode: “…Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Kara looks up from the slip of paper to the doorway. Michael is not appearing.

Kara Strode: “…Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment…”

-Kara slowly begins walking in.

Kara Strode: “…Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

-Kara slowly walks in and feels a cold wind. She also finds herself alone and the window open. Kara stops what she’s doing for a second. Did he climb out the window, or is it a trick? Just to be sure, she continues chanting and begins walking over to the open closet.

Kara Strode: “And also feel the power of Wunjo. Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Kara approaches the open closet.

Kara Strode: “...Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment. Continue listening to Thorn…”

-Kara steps up to the open closet and stops.

Kara Strode: “…Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer. Allow yourself to become consumed by it…”

-Kara looks inside the closet.

Kara Strode: “…And continue listening to…”

-Kara immediately stops chanting. Michael isn’t there. This isn’t a trick.

Kara Strode: “…Oh my gosh…”

-Kara runs out of the first bedroom and back into the first hallway. As she does, the understated “Halloween” theme tones down and the suspenseful version takes over. She turns to Benny, Drew, Russ and Gary.

Kara Strode: “He isn’t in there! He went out the window!”

-All of them turn to each other in disbelief.

Benny Granger: “Out the window? What did he do, climb down?”

Kara Strode: “Either that, or climb up to the roof!”

-Drew turns to Benny and shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “Benny, the balcony! He might have walked over the roof to the balcony!”

-Benny, who is standing by the right end of the second hallway, also shrugs.

Benny Granger: “Uh, right! The bal-Aaarrrggghhh!...”

Drew Mackenzie: “Benny!”

-Drew, Russ and Gary all witness as Michael appears within the darkness behind Benny. With his kitchen knife stabbed into Benny’s back, he steps out of the right end of the second hallway and forces Benny forward. Kara now visibly sees Michael as he steps out of the hallway and forces Benny up to the railing (Thud!).

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh!”

Benny Granger: “Aarrgghh! Argh! Argh!”

-Michael keeps the knife inserted in Benny’s back and begins lifting him up. The others watch in horror as Michael lifts Benny above the railing and all the way up to the ceiling with his right, outstretched arm.

Benny Granger: “Argh! Argh! ARGH!”

-Down below in the den, the others look up and see Benny behind held up to the ceiling. Lindsey can’t believe what she’s seeing.

Lindsey Wallace: “Oh my God! Benny!”

-Drew, Russ and Gary desperately want to shoot Michael and save Benny, but they have no shot from where Michael is standing. It’s like a trainwreck they can’t prevent. Kara, on the other hand, prevails and walks right over to the railing.

Kara Strode: “Michael! Michael, let him go! You don’t have to do this!”

-Michael, keeping Benny in the air, turns to Kara.

Benny Granger: “Argh! Argh!”

Kara Strode: “Michael, don’t listen to what Thorn demands of you! Listen to me! Benny doesn’t have to die! Nobody else has to die! You can stop it! Fight back against Thorn and let Benny live!”

Benny Granger: “Argh! ARGH! Argh!”

-Michael, continuing to keep Benny in the air, keeps his attention on Kara. Meanwhile, Benny starts losing it.

Benny Granger: “Argh! Argh…Argh…”

-Michael looks up at Benny, then back over at Kara. He then starts lowering Benny from the ceiling. He lowers him down to the railing. Benny, on the outside of the railing, wearily looks down at Lindsey.

Benny Granger: “…Argh…Lindsey…”

-Michael then forces Benny back against the railing and pulls the knife out of his body (Shi-i-i-i-ing!). Benny feels the sting.

Benny Granger: “Aaarrrggghhh!”

-Just like Kara asked, Michael is letting Benny go. And the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny!”

-Benny falls below the railing and the second floor. He falls onto the stairs (Thud!) and starts tumbling down them (Tumble! Tumble! Tumble!). He tumbles down to the den (Tumble! Tumble! Thud!) and Lindsey checks up on him.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny? Benny! Answer me!”

-Benny does not respond. Lindsey desperately tries to wake him out it and he still shows no signs of life. Tears begin rolling down her cheeks.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny? Benny! Nooo! Benny!...”

-Back upstairs, Michael stands by the railing and faces Kara. She got her wish. He then turns back to Drew, Russ and Gary. He knows the position he’s in. As long as they’re still there, he can’t touch Kara. He steps away from the railing and begins stepping back into the right end of the second hallway. Drew, however, prevails.

Drew Mackenzie: “Don’t think you’re getting off that easy!”

-Drew points the rifle at Michael and begins firing at him (Bang! Bang!). Michael stumbles back to the end of the hallway and towards the third bedroom. Drew steps after him and continues firing (Bang! Bang! Bang!). Michael stumbles back into the third bedroom and disappears out of sight. Drew steps right over to the open doorway of the third bedroom and sees Michael waiting for him. He faces Michael. Michael faces Drew. Drew then turns to the others and shrugs.

Drew Mackenzie: “Get out of here! Get out of the house! We’ve played enough games!”

-Gary turns to Russ and shrugs.

Gary Stamos: “You heard the man! Let’s get the hell out of here!”

-They step back into the first hallway and walk over to Kara.

Russ Mayer: “Come on. Let’s go.”

-Kara, still in shock, looks on aimlessly.

Kara Strode: “But, Michael…”

Gary Stamos: “Hey, you did everything you could to save Benny. And to reach out to that son of a bitch. Even I believe you now. But it wasn’t enough. It didn’t work. We have to go.”

-Drew watches as Russ and Gary lead Kara over to the stairs. He then turns back to Michael and faces him. Michael continues facing Drew as before. He then starts stepping forward. Drew steps back down the second hallway.

-Back downstairs, Russ and Gary lead Kara back down into the den. Kara looks down and sees Lindsey kneeling by Benny’s body. She then turns to Tommy. Her eyes begin watering and she begins speaking up.

Kara Strode: “Tommy, I…”

-Tommy steps up to Kara and cuts in.

Tommy Doyle: “Kara, you did everything you could up there. I heard you. We all heard you. I know what you must be thinking right now. And it wasn’t your fault. It was Michael’s.”

-Kara faces Tommy and tears roll down her cheeks. He hugs her and silently speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Benny knew the danger. All of you did…It also could have been you…”

-Back upstairs, Drew steps back to the end of the first hallway with his rifle pointed out in front of him. Michael keeps up with him, staring him down with his dead-like eyes. Drew steps around to the stairs. He then turns around and quickly climbs down to the den. He steps back down to the den and turns to the others.

Drew Mackenzie: “Everybody, we have to go. Now!”

-Gary shrugs and turns to the others.

Gary Stamos: “Come on, this way!”

-Everyone but Lindsey and Benny clears the den. Drew steps back in and watches as Lindsey stays by Benny’s side. He kneels down and checks up on Benny. Benny is completely out of it. He turns to Lindsey.

Drew Mackenzie: “Lindsey, we have to go. I’m sorry. It’s too late for Benny.”

Lindsey Wallace: “It can’t be…”

Drew Mackenzie: “I don’t know what else to tell you. We have to go.”

-Drew helps Lindsey up. As he does, he looks up and sees Michael standing at the top of the stairs. Michael stands there and looks down at them as if to give them a head start. Drew braces himself and turns to Lindsey.

Drew Mackenzie: “Let’s get out of here.”

-Drew leads Lindsey out of the den and into the living room.

-Cut to the front lawn of the Doyle house. The front door bursts open and the suspenseful “Halloween” them begins playing again.

-Back inside the house, Michael begins descending down the stairs.

-Back outside, Kara, Danny, John, Tommy, Russ and Gary run out of the house and onto the front lawn.

-Back inside the house, Michael continues descending down the stairs.

-Back outside, Drew and Lindsey run out of the house next.

-Back inside the house, Michael climbs down to the den and steps around to the living room entrance.

-Back outside, the others run over to the trucks parked by the curb.

Russ Mayer: “I say we get the hell away from here and to safety.”

Gary Stamos: “I agree. It’s about time we go to the police. We weren’t able to stop him by ourselves. We only succeeded in letting Benny and Milo getting killed.”

-Kara, Danny, John and Tommy turn to each other and brace themselves. They can’t go the police. The others still don’t know about the cult. Only Benny knew and was beginning to believe them. And now, he’s dead. Drew turns to Russ and Gary.

Drew Mackenzie: “I have a better idea. We go to Lindsey’s house and hold up there.”

Gary Stamos: “What? Are you crazy?”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #27  
Old 06-02-2012, 02:53 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 19

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Drew Mackenzie: “Maybe I am. But I would rather not let Michael Myers get away and haunt this town for another Halloween...”

-Drew turns to Gary.

Drew Mackenzie: “…You’re right. Neither of us have been able to stop him. I say we retreat to Lindsey’s house and call the police. If we’re going to stop him at all, we’ll need their help.”

-Kara, Danny, John and Tommy turn to each other and shrug. This new plan is not any better than their first few tries. Drew turns to Lindsey.

Drew Mackenzie: “Lindsey, are you with me? We need to go back to your house…”

-Suddenly, Michael steps out of the front doorway of the Doyle house. He steps out under the balcony and faces them. He then begins stepping forward.

Drew Mackenzie: “…Right now. Come on!”

-Drew runs for it and leads Lindsey across the street. Michael walks across the front lawn of the Doyle house and onto the sidewalk. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in a notch. Kara, Danny, John, Tommy, Russ and Gary run across the street behind Drew and Lindsey. Michael walks off the curb and onto the street. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in one more notch.

-All eight of them run onto the curb and onto the front lawn of the Wallace house. Drew runs onto the front porch with Lindsey and opens the front door for her.

Drew Mackenzie: “Get in!”

-Drew holds the door open and waits for the others. The others run off the front lawn and onto the front porch. Kara, Danny, John and Tommy run into the house, while Russ and Gary stop and turn to Drew. They then look out for Michael.

-They watch as Michael walks across the street and steps onto the curb. He steps onto the sidewalk and stops in his tracks. He stands his ground and looks over at them. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in one extra notch. They continue looking over at Michael. And then, Michael turns around and begins walking back over to the street. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins toning down.

-Michael steps off the curb and onto the street. He crosses the street and steps onto the next curb. He walks up the front lawn of the Doyle house. And he steps underneath the balcony.

-Michael steps up to the open doorway of the Doyle house. He then stops and turns around. He turns around and faces Drew, Russ and Gary. He then steps back into the Doyle house and shuts the front door. Drew, Russ and Gary look on for a moment. They then turn to each other.

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, he’s not giving up.”

Gary Stamos: “Are you sure about this? We can still get away and call the police. They can take care of him.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Are you kidding? The police have tried for years to catch him. I remember them actually catching him back in `89, and he somehow got away. They’re going to need our help, as much as we need theirs. If we get away right now, it will be a lost cause. He’ll disappear again. As long as he knows we’re still here, he’s not going anywhere.”

-Drew looks over at the Doyle house, then over to the open doorway to the Wallace house.

Drew Mackenzie: “Come on, let’s go in.”

Deleted content: The rednecks go back inside the house and tell the others that they are going to call the police. Unexpectedly, Tommy agrees and suggests they do exactly that. The rednecks watch over the ground floor, while the others stay upstairs. Lindsey retreats to her bedroom and the others stay in a guest room.

-Back in the fourth bedroom, Lindsey stands by the door. She continues facing the door for a moment. She then looks over to the mirror. She looks at her reflection. If the feelings inside of her aren’t enough of an indication, she looks like she’s on the verge of tears. Also reflected in the mirror is her bed. It is untidy. And mere a few hours earlier, she made to love to Benny in it for the last time.

-Lindsey then looks down at the dresser. She looks at the photo of her and Benny. She looks at it for a moment. And then, she finally lets it all out.

Lindsey Wallace: “Aaaahhh!”

-Lindsey sighs of frustration and knocks every item off the top of the dresser (Ching! Cha-ching! Smash!). She then walks over to the bed. She pulls off the covers. She throws down the covers and next pulls off the bed sheets. She lets go bed sheets and prevails. She looks down at the mattress. She then looks over to the fallen photo of her and Benny. And tears begin rolling down her cheeks.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny…”

-She gets down and picks up the photo from the frame and broken glass. She then walks over to the bed. She sits down against the mattress and pulls over the covers and bed sheets. She looks on at the photo and sighs.
Lindsey Wallace: “Benny…”

-Back in the third bedroom, Kara turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “…Tommy, did you not hear what they said? They’re going to call the police. We have to tell them.”

Tommy Doyle: “And tell them what exactly?”

Kara Strode: “We have to tell them everything. They can’t call the police. If they do, they’ll come after us.”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think they will.”

Kara Strode: “You don’t?”

Tommy Doyle: “No.”

-Tommy steps back and sits down on the bed. Kara walks over and sits beside him.

Tommy Doyle: “Remember what I told you before? About the cult being present here in Haddonfield but staying in the shadows?”

Danny Strode: “Really?”

-Tommy turns to Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “Really.”

-Tommy turns back to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “I think I’m right. They’re letting Michael work alone. He’s been working alone all evening so far. After all the cat-and-mouse games we’ve played with him so far tonight, they still haven’t stepped in and given him a hand. I don’t think they are. I’ve seen Michael tonight. So have you. I think he wants to work alone. I think he wants to finish what he started all by himself. Even if they do call the police, I don’t think any cops will come. I don’t think we have to worry about them coming after us.”

Kara Strode: “How sure are you?”

Danny Strode: “Yeah?”

-Tommy turns to Danny, then back Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “I have a good feeling about it.”

Kara Strode: “Okay.”

John Strode: “So, you don’t think they’re coming after us?”

Tommy Doyle: “No. Only Michael.”

John Strode: “Huh…so on one hand, we only have to worry about Michael tonight. But what about after tonight? What if we stop him? Will they still come after us?”

-Tommy turns to John, then over to Kara and Danny. He turns to all them and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think so. They brought all of us together, so that they could fulfill their prophecy. If we fail to stop Michael in any way, we’ll have to wait for the next Halloween to come. We’ll still be in danger. However, if we free him of the evil tonight and prevent the prophecy from coming true, I think we also will be free. We might end up putting Thorn out of business for a while. We will have defied them and won. And they’ll have to leave us alone.”

Kara Strode: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “I think so.”

Kara Strode: “That’s good to hear.”

Danny Strode: “It is.”

John Strode: “It will finally be over.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, it will. But first, we have to figure out what we’ve been doing wrong. We have to figure out the right way to stop him.”

Kara Strode: “That’s right. So, what about that spell?”

Tommy Doyle: “It works. If it didn’t, Michael wouldn’t be so afraid of me reciting it. I just have to recite it in front of him without anymore interruptions or diversions.”

Kara Strode: “What about me? Can I still recite it?”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s a good question. When you recited the spell, did he show fear?”

Kara Strode: “Yes, he did. He came after me.”
Tommy Doyle: “And what happened when you tried reaching out to him?”

Kara Strode: “He didn’t like it. Well, I don’t think Thorn did. I think I stirred something up inside him.”

Tommy Doyle: “That’s good. That’s really good. You know what it means? It means you may have been right. If we give what’s left of his soul a fighting chance, it will be more difficult for Thorn to prevail.”

Kara Strode: “So, what do we do now?”

Tommy Doyle: “We wait for him. And if the police don’t show up like I suspect, it will be up to us and the others downstairs. We’ll have him where we want him.”

Kara Strode: “But how? He’s been one step ahead of us so far. After all the traps and mind games we’ve tried, he’s found a way out. What exactly are we going to do?”

-Tommy turns to Kara for a moment, then over to Danny and John. He then pulls out the occult book.

Tommy Doyle: “I’ll find out how.”

-Cut back to the Doyle house moments later. Michael breathes heavily and paces back and forth from the living room to the dining room. For a moment, he continues pacing back and forth. And then, as he as steps back out of the dining room, he unexpectedly steps over to the den. He walks in and steps past Benny’s body. He walks over to the stairs and begins climbing up to the second floor. He reaches the second floor and starts walking down the first hallway. He passes the railing and disappears out of sight.

-The camera focuses on the railing, then pans down the stairs. It pans down to the den and over to Benny’s body. It focuses on Benny’s body for a moment. And suddenly, Benny picks his head up. He is still alive. He was out cold before and has been playing dead. After Michael’s attack, he is still hanging onto a thread. He looks upstairs, then grasps his back.

Benny Granger: “Ahh…”

-Benny looks beyond the living room entrance. He looks right over to the front door and mutters to himself.

Benny Granger: “I have to get out of here…”

-Unable to get up, he reaches forward with both arms and starts pulling himself out of the den.

Benny Granger: “…Ahh…Ahh…”

-Cut back to the Wallace house. Watching over the kitchen is Russ. Watching over the front entrance is Gary. And watching from the dining room window is Drew. Drew looks out the window for a moment. He then immediately sees something of a miracle across the street. He sees the front door to the Doyle house opening, and he sees Benny crawling out beneath the balcony.

Drew Mackenzie: “Oh my gosh…Benny!”

-Drew runs out of the dining room and into the hallway. As he runs from the hallway to the front of the house, he calls out to Russ.

Drew Mackenzie: “Russ, the living room now!”

-Drew runs around to the front of the house and turns to Gary.

Drew Mackenzie: “Gary, it’s Benny. He’s still alive.”

Gary Stamos: “You’re kidding.”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m not.”

-Russ runs in from the hallway and turns to them questionably.

Russ Mayer: “What’s going on?”

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s Benny. He’s still alive. You stay here and watch the others. We’re going to get him.”

Russ Mayer: “Whatever you say.”

-Back across the street, Benny pulls himself across the front lawn of the Doyle house.

Benny Granger: “…Ahh…Ahh…Ahh…”

-Suddenly, he sees the front door to the Wallace house open up. Drew and Gary run out, and he wearily speaks up.

Benny Granger: “Drew…Gary…Ahh…”

-Benny continues pulling himself across the front lawn. He watches as the others run from the front lawn of the Wallace house to the sidewalk. He then takes notice as they suddenly stop in their tracks. Getting a very bad feeling, he tenses up.

Benny Granger: “Oh, no…”

-Benny looks back and sees Michael stepping out of the open doorway. Michael steps out underneath the balcony and stops. He looks down at Benny, then over to the others.

-Back in the fourth bedroom in the Wallace house, Lindsey heard the commotion. She looks out the window and can see Benny across the street.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny!”

-Back outside, Benny looks over at Drew and Gary, and continues pulling himself across the lawn.

Benny Granger: “…Ahh…Ahh…”

-Back in the Wallace house, Lindsey runs downstairs. So do Kara, Danny, John and Tommy.

-Drew and Gary both shrug and continue running for the Doyle house. At the same time, Michael begins stepping forward. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing. Benny continues pulling himself across the front lawn.

Benny Grange: “…Ahh…Ahh…”

-The others run from the curb to the street. Michael steps out from underneath the balcony. Benny desperately pulls himself further down front lawn.

Benny Granger: “…Ahh…Ahh…”

-The others run across the street. Michael makes his way across the lawn and closes in behind Benny. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in a notch. Benny continues his journey across the front lawn.

Benny Granger: “…Ahh…Ahh…”

-Next thing he knows, Michael steps up right alongside him (Thump!). Benny stops and looks up. What he sees is Michael reaching down for him.

Benny Granger: “No…No…”

-Michael takes hold of Benny (Clench! Clench!) and picks him up. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” kicks in one more notch.

Benny Granger: “…Ahh…Ahh…”

-Michael pulls Benny up to his level and stares him down with his dead-like eyes. He then turns Benny around and holds him back with his left hand. Drew and Gary make it to the curb and witness as Michael holds Benny’s head back with his left hand. All the others in the Wallace house witness from the open doorway. All eight of them witness as Michael pulls out his kitchen knife with his right hand (Shing!). Once again, Lindsey finds Benny in an impossible situation.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #28  
Old 06-02-2012, 03:02 PM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 20

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny! Benny!”

Benny Granger: “Lindsey…”

-With Benny’s head held back, Michael swings the knife forward (Swish!) and slices it across Benny’s throat (Shi-i-i-i-ing! Spla-a-a-a-ater!).

Benny Granger: “A-a-a-argh…”

Lindsey Wallace: “Benny! Nooo!”

-Benny loses it and his head sags over. As his arms and legs suddenly go limp, Michael catches him. Michael catches Benny’s lifeless body in his arms and faces Drew and Gary. And the suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins toning down.

Drew Mackenzie: “Benny…”

-Michael turns around and starts walking back over to the Doyle house with Benny’s body in his arms. He walks across the lawn and steps up to the balcony. He steps below the balcony and back into the house. They watch as he disappears inside and as the front door momentarily closes shut. Drew and Gary stand there for a moment. Drew, in particular, feels Lindsey’s pain.

Drew Mackenzie: “Benny…”

Gary Stamos: “Let’s go back to the house.”

Drew Mackenzie: “Yeah…Yeah…”

-Drew and Gary turn around and start crossing the street.

-Back in the Doyle house, Michael places Benny’s body onto the couch in the den. He then steps back into the living room. He walks over to the front window and watches the others make their way back to the Wallace house.

-Back across the street, Drew and Gary walk back into the Wallace house. Drew shuts the front door and locks it (Click! Chi-ching!). He then turns around and sees Lindsey. She’s now lost Benny twice. He faces her for a moment, then begins speaking up.

Drew Mackenzie: “Lindsey…”

-Lindsey shrugs and runs away into the hallway. She runs up the stairs and to the second floor. They listen as she slams her bedroom door (Thud!). A moment passes and all seven of them don’t know what to say. Finally, Drew sighs.

Drew Mackenzie: “Oh my gosh…”

-Tommy also sighs.

Tommy Doyle: “I can’t begin to imagine how she feels…”

-Drew turns to Tommy and prevails.

Drew Mackenzie: “How could you understand how she feels? After all these years, you decided to invade her life again. And at the cost of the man she loved. And also at the cost of a friend. Not just one of our friends, but two of them. They’re dead because of you. Because you came back after so damn long…”

-Tommy sighs.

Drew Mackenzie: “…Before today and this Halloween, we stayed quiet about the past. After what happened in 1995, and after you disappeared, we decided to stop talking about anything having to do with Halloween. And guess what? He left our town for good and appeared in another part of the country…”

-John shrugs. Michael didn’t just appear in another part of the country, he appeared in California where he and his mother lived.

Drew Mackenzie: “…He stayed away and didn’t come back until the mayor allowed that goddamn TV stint at the Myers house. None of us were happy about it, but he thought Michael was long gone. And he thought it would bring tourism back. It did, and also at a cost. There have been a lot more fanatics in the last few years and they won’t stay out of our faces about Halloween and goddamn conspiracies. Well, as far as I can tell, you are no better than them. You were a fanatic about Halloween since you were a kid, and you haven’t changed. You would still rather play cat-and-mouse games with Michael Myers and put all of us in danger.”

-Drew sighs of frustration and turns away from Tommy. He walks away from the front and into the living room. Kara turns to him, then over to Tommy. Tommy sighs. Unexpectedly, John speaks up.

John Strode: “So, you say.”

-Drew turns to John questionably.

Drew Mackenzie: “You got something to say, kid?”

John Strode: “Yes, I do.”

-John walks into the living room and steps up to Drew.

John Strode: “You say that you stopped talking about Halloween. And that as a result, he left Haddonfield.”

Drew Mackenzie: “So?”

John Strode: “You know where he went after 1995? He went to California. He left Haddonfield and went after me and my mother in California. Like you seem to think, I guess he got bored of no longer being part of current events here and decided to stir things up elsewhere…”

-Drew sighs.

John Strode: “…You know what happened when he found us? My mother, who you might remember here as Laurie Strode, was driven over the edge. He drove her over the edge and she wound up being put away. For that matter, her life wasn’t much easier before then. She looked over her shoulder every passing day and became increasingly paranoid every Halloween. And in the end, she was taken away from me…”

-Drew begins speaking up.

Drew Mackenzie: “Look, kid…”

-John, however, continues.

John Strode: “…But I guess you’re happy about that, huh? As long as it directed my uncle’s attention off of Haddonfield, who cares about him anymore! Who cares about Laurie Strode! And who cares about me! Screw the rest of us who have been forced away into witness protection, while all of you can live freely without big brother watching over your shoulder!”

-John sighs of frustration and walks away into the hallway.

Kara Strode: “John…”

-Danny watches as John disappears out of sight. He then shrugs and turns to Drew.

Danny Strode: “Yeah, and who cares about me!”

-Danny walks away into the hallway.

Kara Strode: “Danny…”

-Kara turns to Drew.

Kara Strode: “The nerve.”

-Kara walks away into the hallway, leaving Tommy alone with Drew, Russ and Gary. Tommy watches as Kara disappears out of sight. He then sighs and turns to Drew. Drew sighs and turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “I don’t know where to begin…”

Tommy Doyle: “Neither do I…”

-Back upstairs, John storms into the middle bedroom. Danny, soon after, steps up to the second floor and also storms into it. He sees John sitting on the bed. John turns to him, then looks away. Danny sighs and walks over. He sits down at the other end. John sighs and speaks up.

John Strode: “I guess neither of us have had it that easy.”

Danny Strode: “Nope.”

-Kara walks in and turns to Danny. She then turns to John. She steps up to the bed and sits down between them. She sighs and begins speaking up.

Kara Strode: “We’ve all been through so much…”

John Strode: “You can say that again…”

Danny Strode: “Yep…”

-Kara turns to Danny, then over to John.

Kara Strode: “I can’t imagine how empty you felt inside before you met us and found out about…everything.”

John Strode: “As painful as it all is, this is what I needed. I’m not happy that two more people have died, but I’m still glad to be here.”

Kara Strode: “I’m glad that you’re here, too.”

-Kara turns to Danny. She looks on at him for a moment, then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “I’m sorry if I wasn’t there for you the last several years. I wasn’t trying to alienate you. I was trying to move on. The only way I knew how. And I guess I left you behind.”

Danny Strode: “I understand.”

Kara Strode: “And yet, I didn’t. We both experienced the same god awful Halloween and I wasn’t there for you in the aftermath. I see through so many people and their problems, and yet I failed to understand how you were feeling. I am so sorry…”

Danny Strode: “It’s okay.”

Kara Strode: “No, it isn’t okay. I’m your mother. And I’m also a psychologist. And if there’s a blurred line between each of those roles that prevented me from seeing what was happening to you, and making you feel all alone...I don’t know what to think…”

Danny Strode: “Forget about it. It doesn’t matter anymore. You’re here for me now.”

Kara Strode: “That’s right. I am. And I always will be from now on.”

John Strode: “And so will I. I’m here for both of you…”

-Kara turns to John, then back to Danny. She turns to both of them and speaks up.

Kara Strode: “When this is over…”

-John, knowing what she’s about to say, cuts in.

John Strode: “Everything is going to be better.”

Kara Strode: “That’s right.”

Danny Strode: “Yeah.”

-Tommy walks into the bedroom. Kara turns to him, then gets up from the bed. Tommy walks over to her, then turns to Danny and John. He turns back to Kara and speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “It’s okay. We’ve cleared the air.”

Kara Strode: “So have we.”

-Tommy looks on at Kara, then turns to Danny and John. They get up and Danny speaks up.

Danny Strode: “It’s the darkness. It’s everywhere. People are still dying and it’s affecting all of us.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know it is.”

John Strode: “We are this close to stopping my uncle. We still have time. And we have to do it now.”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes, we do. Michael knows that he’s running out of time as well. He isn’t going to waste any more time. So, we have to be ready. If we hold up here, he’ll have to stop hiding and take action.”

Deleted content: A half hour passes and the local police don’t show up. The rednecks don’t know what to make of it. The others, however, are glad that no police have arrived. It means that Michael really is working alone. Kara also expresses concern over whether the good within Michael will be brave enough to fight back against Thorn. She has now had a chance to reach out to Michael, and she knows there is another person inside him.

-Back upstairs in the second bedroom, Tommy lays down a bed and is reading the occult book. He then sits up and mutters to himself.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh my gosh. That’s it. I don’t know how I missed that.”

-Tommy gets off the bed and steps out of the second bedroom. He walks out into the hallway and over to the third bedroom. He opens the door, walks in and turns to the others.

Tommy Doyle: “I got it.”

Kara Strode: “You do?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes. I know why he’s been so much more resilient tonight than he was in the past. And I think it will help us stop him.”

Kara Strode: “How?”

-Tommy walks over to the bed and sits down beside Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “It’s us. It’s all four of us. Or rather, all three of you. As long as more of his family is present on Halloween, the more resilient Michael is. And tonight is the first time all of his remaining blood has been rounded up. Except for Stephen Lloyd. We still don’t know how he’s doing. Other than him, we are allowing Michael to be become that much stronger.”

Kara Strode: “Well, what does that mean? That as long as we’re all here, it will be impossible to stop him?”

Tommy Doyle: “No. Not necessarily. If we all fight back and try reaching out to him together, we can use that power against him. We can scare him. Just like I did, and just like you did.”

Kara Strode: “Really?”

Tommy Doyle: “Yes.”

-Kara sighs of relief and hugs Tommy.

Kara Strode: “Oh my gosh! I can’t believe it.”

Tommy Doyle: “I know. It’s good news. But it’s not going to make stopping Michael that much easier. It will still be scary and difficult.”

Danny Strode: “Well, I’m up to the task.”

John Strode: “So am I.”

Deleted content: This leaves Lindsey and the rednecks. They all have to work together to make this work. Kara suggests that she be the one who talks to Lindsey. She approaches Lindsey very gently, and Lindsey agrees to help. It is Tommy who goes downstairs and talks to Drew about this last ditch effort. Will Drew hear Tommy out?

TO BE CONTINUED TOMORROW WITH THE FINAL PORTION...

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-02-2012 at 03:06 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #29  
Old 06-03-2012, 12:02 AM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 21

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-Cut to the dark screen. It fades in to reveal the neighborhood later on in the late evening. The eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up again and heavy breathing is heard.

-Cut to the Doyle house. And cut to living room. Michael is not there. Cut to the dining room and the kitchen in the back. Michael is not there. Cut to the den. Michael is not there. Cut to where the first and second hallways on the second floor intercept. Michael is not there. Cut to where the second and third hallways intercept. Michael is not there. Cut to where the third and fourth hallways intercept. Michael is not there. Cut to where the fourth and fifth hallways intercept. Michael is not there.

-Cut to the third bedroom. The camera pans out of an empty bedroom and onto the balcony. It also is empty. Michael is not there. He is no longer inside the Doyle house. Where is he?

-Cut to Michael’s point of view as he steps out of a backyard and into another one. He steps through the darkness of the night and up to the back of the Wallace house. As he does, the eerie “Halloween” theme plays on.

-Watching the kitchen is Russ. He watches from the back window pane doors. At first, he doesn’t see it. And then, he does. What he sees is the pale face of a white Halloween mask making its presence known in the darkness outside. As he sees Michael step within several feet of the back doors, he shrugs.

Russ Mayer: “Hey, guys! He’s here!”

-Drew calls from the hallway.

Drew Mackenzie: “Well, let him in!”

-Russ watches as Michael stops in his tracks and looks over at him. Russ looks over at Michael and braces himself. He continues looking over at Michael and tenses up. Michael continues looking over at Russ. He then begins stepping forward. As he does, the eerie “Halloween” theme tones down and the suspenseful version takes over.

Russ Mayer: “All right, he’s coming for the doors.”

-Michael approaches the two window pane doors. As he does, Russ begins stepping back to the hallway entrance. Michael steps up to the doors and Russ steps further back. As Michael steps right up to the doors, he doesn’t even bother reaching for the door knobs. As Russ steps back to the hallway entrance, he witnesses as Michael forces himself through both doors.

Russ Mayer: “Oh my gosh!”

-Michael steps through both doors (Crunch! Smash!). The window panes shatter (Smash! Shatter! Shatter! Crunch!), and so do the wooden frames (Smash! Crunch! Cha-ching! Cha-ching!).

Russ Mayer: “Oh my God!”

-Michael steps inside the kitchen and onto some shattered glass (Smash!). He stops and looks over at Russ. He then begins stepping forward and the suspenseful “Halloween” theme kicks in a notch. Russ shrugs and steps back into the hallway. He walks over to the stairs, where Drew and Gary are waiting for him.

Russ Mayer: “You won’t fucking believe it! He walked right through both doors!”

Drew Mackenzie: “I’m more than willing to believe it! Come on!”

-Back in the kitchen, Michael makes his way from the open entrance. He makes his way through the middle of the kitchen and over to the hallway entrance. As he does, he pulls out his kitchen knife (Shing!).

-Michael steps out of the kitchen and into the hallway. As he does, the suspenseful “Halloween” theme tones down and the understated version takes over. He turns his Halloween-masked head over to the basement door to the left. He then looks over to the other end of the hallway. Lastly, he steps over to the stairs and looks up to the second floor. He looks on up for a moment, then over to the right end of the hallway.

-Michael looks over to front end of the hallway, then begins stepping away from the stairs. He steps away from the stairs and approaches the open entrance to the bathroom. As he steps past the bathroom, he glances inside. He steps beyond the bathroom and up to the dining room. He steps up to the open entrance and glance inside. Nobody is there.

-Michael steps out of the hallway and into the front entrance of the house. He looks around and sees nobody. He then steps over to the living room entrance. He glances inside and sees nobody. Wishing to waste no more time, he steps back over to the hallway.

-Michael steps back into hallway and walks up to the stairs. He climbs up the first step and begins ascending to the second floor. He climbs further and further up. He makes his way from the top step and is about to climb up to the second floor. He then stops and looks around. He breathes heavily. Ordinarily, he wouldn’t be so reluctant. But he has to watch out for Tommy. He has to somehow outwit Tommy and finally finish what he started.

-Michael looks over to the closed door belonging to the first bedroom. He then looks over to the closed door belonging to the second bedroom. He looks around and sees the doors belonging to the third and fourth bedrooms, as well as the bathroom, all shut. He looks back in front of him and finally steps up.

-Michael steps up to the second floor. As he does, the understated “Halloween” theme tones down and dead silence takes over. He steps past the first bedroom to his right. He steps around the railing and steps past the second bedroom to his right. He begins stepping down the first hallway. He continues making his way down the hallway and approaches the third bedroom. He begins stepping past the third bedroom. And suddenly, the door to the second bedroom opens and Tommy steps out.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael.”

-Michael stops in his tracks and looks over at Tommy. And next thing he knows, John is stepping out of the bedroom next. He steps out into the hallway and beside Tommy. He bravely speaks up.

John Strode: “Michael.”

-Michael looks over at John. He then looks at both of them and turns around. He begins stepping towards them. And suddenly, the door to the fourth bedroom opens and Danny steps out.

Danny Strode: “Michael.”

-Michael stops in his tracks and looks back over to Danny. And next thing he knows, Kara is stepping out after him. She also bravely speaks up.

Kara Strode: “Michael.”

-Michael looks over at Kara and Danny. He then looks back over at John and Tommy. And unexpectedly, one more person steps out of the second bedroom. Lindsey steps out into the hallway and beside Tommy and John. She bravely speaks up.

Lindsey Wallace: “Michael.”

-Michael looks on at Lindsey, then over to John and Tommy. He turns to all three of them for a moment. And then, unwilling to deal with Tommy, he turns around and starts stepping towards Kara and Danny. Tommy immediately begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn.”

-Michael stops and looks back towards Tommy. John continues the chant, and so does Lindsey.

John Strode: “Allow it to flow through your body.”

Lindsey Wallace: “Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel.”

-Michael turns around and begins stepping back towards them. As he does, Danny continues where they left off.

Danny Strode: “Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment.”

-Michael stops again and looks back towards Danny. Unexpectedly, Kara begins speaking up in a calm, natural manner.

Kara Strode: “Michael, don’t be afraid. We’re only trying to help you…”

-Michael turns around and begins stepping back over towards Kara and Danny. Danny stops chanting and John, Tommy and Lindsey all continue where he left off. At the same time, Kara continues reaching out to Michael.
John, Tommy and Lindsey: “Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn…”

Kara Strode: “…Don’t be afraid of our words. They’re not meant to harm you. They only intend to free your soul…”

John, Tommy and Lindsey: “…Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

Kara Strode: “…Fight back, Michael. Fight back against the evil…”

-Michael closely approaches John, Tommy and Lindsey. Danny then takes over for them.

Danny Strode: “And also feel the power of Wunjo…”

Kara Strode: “…Fight back against Thorn. Fight back against its awful intentions…”

-Michael stops and turns around. He starts stepping back towards Kara and Danny.

Danny Strode: “…Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

Kara Strode: “…Stop listening to Thorn and listen to me. Ignore what Thorn wants of you and listen to what I have to say. We’re on your side. Thorn isn’t…”

-As Michael steps past the third bedroom and approaches Kara and Danny, he suddenly stops. He grasps his Halloween-masked head with both hands as if something is getting stirred up inside him. Danny continues chanting and the others join him.

Danny, John, Tommy and Lindsey: “Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment. Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer. Allow yourself to become consumed by it…”

Kara Strode: “…I know you must be feeling an inner battle right now. If it hurts, it is only temporary. Ignore the pain, as well as Thorn’s torment, and continue listening to us. And listen to me…”

-Michael continues grasping his head.

Danny, John, Tommy and Lindsey: “…And continue listening to Wunjo. Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul…”

Kara Strode: “…Listen to me, Michael. Listen to all of us. Listen to our words and continue fighting back against the torment Thorn is forcing on you…”

-As Kara continues reaching out to Michael, and as the others continue chanting, the door to the first bedroom opens up. Drew steps out of the bedroom and into the hallway. At the same time, the door to the bathroom also opens. Russ and Gary both step out. Kara steps aside and allows Russ and Gary room. Drew, Russ and Gary all point their rifles at Michael and wait to fire. As they do, Kara braces herself. Are they planning on killing Michael?

-Michael continues grasping his head. Danny, John, Tommy and Lindsey continue chanting.

Danny, John, Tommy and Lindsey: “...And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn…”

-Kara, as concerned as she is for Michael, continues reaching out to him.

Kara Strode: “…Michael, don’t be afraid. This is the end of the darkness…”

-Michael begins letting go of his Halloween-masked head. He lowers his arms and faces the end of his journey. Danny, John, Tommy and Lindsey finally finish the chant.

Danny, John, Tommy and Lindsey: “…Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and cancel each of their powers out. Now.”

Kara Strode: “...Allow yourself to fight back against Thorn and step out of the darkness. Step out of the darkness and into the light…”

-Michael lowers his arms and looks over at Tommy. Tommy looks over at Michael. And for a second, Tommy locks eyes with him. He can actually see it. He sees something different in Michael’s eyes. He can see Michael changing from what he used to be for over forty years. Tommy then looks over at Drew. He shrugs and begins speaking up.

Tommy Doyle: “Drew, wait…”

-Drew, however, is too trigger-happy to hear Tommy. He immediately begins firing his rifle at Michael (Bang! Bang! Bang!).

-Michael stumbles back into the closed door of the third bedroom (Thud!), and Russ and Gary starting firing at Michael as well (Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang!). Kara can’t believe what is happening. She thought they were trying to save Michael, not kill him. She shrugs.

Kara Strode: “No!”

-Drew continues firing at Michael (Bang! Bang!). So do Russ and Gary (Bang! Bang! Bang! Bang!). Kara sighs of disbelief. This isn’t what she wanted.

Kara Strode: “No! Nooo! Stop shooting him!”

-Tommy watches Kara react and sighs. He knew she didn’t want this, but he had to compromise with Drew. Michael continues taking each shot against the bedroom door. Drew fires the remaining bullets in his clip (Bang! Bang! Ching!). Russ fires the remaining bullets in his clip (Bang! Bang! Bang! Ching!). And Gary fires the remaining bullets in his clip (Bang! Bang! Bang! Ching!).

-Michael takes all of their remaining shots and stumbles back into the bedroom door (Thud!). He then collapses forward and over the railing (Thud!). All of them witness as he lifelessly falls over the railing and from the second floor. He falls from the second floor to the stairs (Thud!). He tumbles down the stairs (Tumble! Tumble! Tumble! Tumble!...) and to the ground floor (…Thud!).

-All of them step over to the railing and look over. Michael, laying on his back, is motionless. Tommy looks down at Michael’s body, then turns to Kara. Kara turns to Tommy in disbelief. Her eyes are watering up. She turns away from him and steps back to the wall. She then collapses and slides down the wall to the floor (Thud!). As she begins mourning for Michael, Danny steps over to her.

Danny Strode: “Mom…”

-Tommy looks on at Kara and sighs. He then turns to Drew. Drew turns to Tommy and prevails. They got Michael. For good. The camera focuses on Michael’s lifeless body. As it begins panning away from him, the screen begins fading out…

Deleted content: If that finale seems a little too simple in execution, it is. The nightmare isn’t over yet. In the aftermath, before Halloween evening is over, the main characters go back to the motel. At first, Kara is upset with Tommy over compromising with Drew. She only wanted to free Michael of Thorn, not kill him. Tommy suggests that Michael’s soul may be better off free of Thorn and all of the legal bullshit. If he lived, nobody would have listened to his side of the story. He would have gone to prison. He wouldn’t have been free after all. Kara begins to see where Tommy is coming from.

Deleted content: Very shortly, they hear numerous cop cars with their sirens on driving by and something seems wrong. Very wrong. John, in particular, sighs of disbelief and heads off to the Myers house alone.

-Cut to John driving down a block of town. The eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. Cut to the Myers house. Heavy breathing is heard. Cut to John driving down another block of town. Cut to the front entrance of the Myers house, as well as the stairs and front hallway beyond it. Cut to John driving down another block of town. Cut to the living room of the Myers house.

-Cut to John driving out of town and into the first block of the neighborhood. Cut to the kitchen of the Myers house. Cut to John driving down the second block of the neighborhood. Cut to the dining room of the Myers house. Cut to John driving down the third block of the neighborhood. Cut to the TV room of the Myers house. Cut to John driving down the fourth block of the neighborhood. And cut to the hallway on the second floor of the Myers house. The heavy breathing stops. If Michael is there, where is he?

-John pulls up to the Myers house and parks in front of it (Screech!). He gets out of his car and shuts the driver’s side door (Slam!). As he steps onto the curb and over to the front lawn, the eerie “Halloween” theme dramatically plays on. John stands his ground and faces the old house. He then steps onto the front lawn and begins stepping up to it.

-As John approaches the Myers house, the front door begins swinging open (Cre-e-e-e-a-a-ak!...). The eerie “Halloween” theme tones down. John stops and watches as the door slowly swings open (…Cre-e-e-e-a-a-ak!...). The door swings all the way open (…Cre-e-e-e-a-a-ak!), and John finds himself welcomed with open arms by the darkness beyond the doorway.

-John tenses up. He looks on at the house and the camera focuses on the front porch. The darkness of the open doorway remains unclear and unfocused. There is no movement within it. And then, something begins to slowly appear within that darkness. It is a face. A pale face. Could it be the ghost of Judith Myers who died there? Or could it be the pale face of a white Halloween mask? Whatever it is, John feels as if it is looking right back at him.

John Strode: “Oh my gosh…”

-The pale face slowly vanishes within the darkness and is gone. John looks on in disbelief. He then tenses up big time. He stands his ground on the front lawn for a moment. He looks over at the Myers house, then looks away. He looks back over at the house, then looks away again. Finally, he shrugs and pulls out the knife Benny gave to him. He pulls open the blade (Shing!) and looks back over at the house. And he begins walking up to it.

-John crosses the front lawn and steps up to the front porch. He steps onto the porch and approaches the open doorway. He stops within three feet of the doorway and braces himself. This is the closest he’s ever been to the Myers house. Let alone standing on its porch. He takes a deep breath and begins stepping forward.

-Cut to the interior of the front entrance. Cut to the open doorway. John walks in one step at a time. He steps a couple of feet inside the house and stops. He looks around. To the left is the entrance to the living room. Up ahead is the stairs leading to the second floor. Also up ahead, to the right of the stairs, is a hallway leading to a closet at the end. And to the right is the entrance to the TV room.

-John takes a good look around. He then checks the time on his watch. He’s running out of time before midnight. Before Halloween is over. He has no time to fool around. John begins stepping forward. He steps up to the railing of the stairs and looks up to the second floor. He then looks into the front hallway. He steps back and looks over at both entrances leading to the living room and TV room. He then speaks up.

John Strode: “Well, where are you? I know you’re here. I know you want to kill me as badly as I want to kill you. And you also must realize that we’re short on time before Halloween is over. So, come on out already. Let’s get this over with.”

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-07-2012 at 06:47 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #30  
Old 06-03-2012, 12:11 AM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Part 22

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

-John stands his ground for a moment. He hears nothing but dead silence. And then, Michael appears. He appears within the living room and steps up to the entrance. John looks over at Michael, then turns around to face him. Michael remains by the living room entrance and faces John. John bravely steps away from the stairs and closer up to Michael. He stops within three feet of Michael and faces him. Michael breathes heavily and faces John. John then begins speaking up.

John Strode: “So, is it true? Are you really not a maniac? Are you really a man not in control of your actions? Am I really supposed to believe you’re innocent of everything you’ve done to hurt our family, as well as many other families?”

-Michael stands his ground and faces John. John faces him and continues.

John Strode: “Better question. Did you kill my mother? Did you track her down in 2001 and murder her?”

-Michael continues standing his ground. At first, he gives no sign of an answer. And then, he begins tilting his Halloween-masked head to the side. John gulps.

John Strode: “It was you, wasn’t it?”

-Michael keeps his head tilted and faces John.

John Strode: “Well, if that’s true, and if there’s really two sides to you like Tommy and Kara believe, I have a hard time sympathizing for you. It may have been you, and it may not have, but you still murdered my mother. You still murdered Kara’s family. And you still murdered all those other people. I’m not about going to let you get away with that. It ends now. It ends tonight.”

-John prevails and faces Michael. Michael continues tilting his head and facing John. He then turns to John and begins stepping forward. He steps out of the living room and into the front entrance. As he does, John steps back. Michael steps on into the front entrance with his dead-like eyes fixed on John. John continues stepping back. Michael then pulls out his kitchen knife (Shing!). John braces himself and tightly grasps his own knife (Clench!).

-John steps out of the front entrance and back into the TV room. Michael continues stepping after him. And suddenly, Michael stops in his tracks and stabs his knife into the wall (Sha-shing!). John stops and shrugs. He watches as Michael reaches for his Halloween-masked head with both hands and grasps the sides of it. Did he strike a nerve in Michael? Did he stir up the good?

-Michael continues grasping his head. He also steps away from John and back over to the living room. He steps back into the living room and disappears out of sight. John stands there in the TV room for a moment. He looks straight ahead into the living room, then over to the kitchen knife sticking out of the wall.

-John begins stepping forward. He steps out of the TV room and back into the front entrance. He makes his way through the front entrance. He passes the front hallway. He approaches the stairs. He passes the stairs and finds himself approaching the living room entrance. He then stops and speaks up.

John Strode: “What’s wrong, Michael? Did my words hurt you? Did they strike a chord? Well, good. After all the damage you’ve caused, you deserve every little bit of punishment.”

-John begins stepping forward again. He steps up to the living room entrance. He bravely steps inside the living room. And next thing he knows, he is immediately attacked by Michael (Thwonk!) and slammed against the front wall (Thud!). Was this just another diversion set up by Michael?

John Strode: “Argh!”

-Michael, keeping hold of John (Clench! Clench!), steps back and slams John into the wall again (Thud!).

John Strode: “Argh!”

-Michael steps back and slams John into the wall once more (Thud!).

John Strode: “Argh!”

-Michael steps back and slams John into the wall once again (Thud!).

John Strode: “Argh!”

-Michael steps back one more time. As he does, John pulls his knife out in front of him (Swish!). Michael slams John into the wall one more time (Thud!) and steps into the knife (Shing! Splatter!). Michael steps back and lets John go (Thud!). He looks down at John, then over to the knife stabbed into his chest. He then single-handedly pulls the knife out (Sha-shing!) and tosses it aside. John watches as the knife lands across the living room (Sha-shing!). He then looks back up to see Michael reaching for him.

John Strode: “No! Nooo!”

-Cut to the front entrance. And cut to the entrance leading to the living room. John is thrown in from the living room and onto the wooden floor of the front entrance (Thud!).

John Strode: “Ooof!”

-Michael walks right on in and steps up to John. He stops within a foot of John and looks down at him. John looks up at Michael and braces himself. Michael then steps over to the open front door. As he does, John starts crawling back. Michael takes hold of the door and forces the wooden frame into the doorway (Thud!). He steps back from the door and turns his attention to the wall, where he left his kitchen knife.

-Michael reaches over and pulls the knife out of the wall (Sha-shing!). He then looks down and doesn’t see John. He looks around the front entrance and finds John missing. The moment Michael turned his back, John took the opportunity to hide. It appears Michael has one more game of hide-and-seek to play. And this time, John wants Michael to find him.

-Michael looks over to the TV room entrance. He then steps inside and looks around. John is not to be seen. He stops and looks back over to the living room entrance. He then looks back into the TV room and over to the dining room entrance. And he begins stepping towards it.

-Michael makes his way through the TV room. He walks up to the door leading to the dining room. He pushes it open and walks in. Michael steps on into the dining room and looks around. Nothing but the dining room table and the doorway to the kitchen. He takes a good look around. He then steps over to the kitchen entrance. He steps up to the door and opens it. He disappears into the kitchen and closes the door behind him.

-The camera stays put in front of the kitchen door for a moment. It then begins panning away. It pans past the dining room table and over to the open doorway to the TV room. It pans over to the corner, where the door is swung over. And the door begins swinging open on its own. The door slowly swings open and a hand appears. The door swings halfway open and John steps out from the corner.

-John steps out of the corner and sighs of relief. He steps forward and looks over to the closed door to the kitchen. He then looks through the open doorway to the TV room. He looks back around the dining room and braces himself. What is he going to do? He knows that Michael forced the front door shut. If he can’t pull it open, how else can he get out? Deciding to face Michael alone may have proven to be a stupid move on his part.

-John looks around the dining room again. He looks over to the closed door to the kitchen. He then looks through the open doorway to the TV room. And that’s when he notices something. It is the front window. It is boarded up with pieces of wood. However, it appears that one of them in the middle has been removed. There is an open space in the middle of the window, and that might be his only way out.

-John stands there in the dining room for a moment. He then starts stepping forward. He starts walking over to the open doorway to the TV room. He steps up to it and stops within a foot of it. He looks straight ahead at the window and braces himself. He then steps into the TV room.

-John steps into the TV room and looks around. He is alone. However, he doesn’t know if Michael has made his way around to the front of the house by now. He doesn’t know if Michael is waiting for him. John stands by the doorway for a moment. Then, he shrugs. He starts running for the window. He runs through the TV room and right for the window.

-John runs up to the window and stops. He quickly looks around and does not see Michael in the front entrance. He shrugs and gets down to his knees. He takes hold of the lower piece of wood and pulls his head through. With his arms and head out on the porch, he reaches forward and tries pulling his upper torso through the open space. He manages to pull his chest out and then rolls around onto his back. He slips his legs out and crawls back. Now back on the porch, John gets back up and sighs of relief.

-At the same time, a familiar SUV pulls up to the house (Screech!). The driver’s side door opens and Tommy steps out. He looks over to the house and sees John.

Tommy Doyle: “John!”

John Strode: “Tommy!”

-Suddenly, before John can get away, the pieces of wood boarded over the window break away (Crunch! Cha-ching! Smash!). It is the sheer force of Michael who breaks them and he takes hold of John (Clench! Clench!).

John Strode: “No! No!”

Tommy Doyle: “John!”

-Michael pulls John back inside the house and into the TV room. Wasting no time, and playing no more games, Michael pulls John all the way back into the dining room. He forces John up to the dining room table (Thud!). And with both hands, he raises John up and slams him onto the table (Thud!).

John Strode: “Argh!”

-John looks up and finds himself on the dining room table. He then looks further up and sees Michael staring him down with his dead-like eyes. With his left hand, Michael keeps John down. And with his right hand, he raises the kitchen knife (Shi-i-i-i-ing!). John immediately shrugs.

John Strode: “No! Nooo! Michael!”

-Back outside, Tommy runs onto the front porch. He runs right over to the open window to the right.

Tommy Doyle: “John! John!”

-Back inside, Michael swings his kitchen knife all the way up with his outstretched arm. He keeps it in the air and looks down at John. John looks up at Michael and tenses up big time. And the eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. Tommy is just outside. Is it too late for him to save John? As the eerie “Halloween” theme plays on, Michael swings the knife forward (Swish!) and stabs it into John’s chest (Shing! Splatter!).

John Strode: “Argh!”

-Michael pulls the knife out of John’s chest (Sha-shing!), and John feels the sting.

John Strode: “Ahhh!”

-Michael swings the knife back (Swish!) and swings it forward again (Swish!). He stabs it into John’s chest a second time (Shing! Splatter!).

John Strode: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael pulls the knife back out (Sha-shing!) and swings it back (Swish!).

John Strode: “Ahhh!”

-Michael swings the knife forward and stabs it into John’s chest a third time (Shing! Splatter!).

John Strode: “Argh! Argh!”

-Michael pulls the knife back out (Sha-shing!) and swings the knife back (Swish!).

John Strode: “Ahhh!”

-Michael looks down at John unmercifully. He then looks back over to the closed door leading to the TV room, where Tommy must be. He’s done his part. But just to be sure, he stabs the knife into John a fourth time (Sha-shing! Splatter!). The eerie “Halloween” theme begins toning down.

John Strode: “Argh! ARGH!”

-Back in the TV room, Tommy heard John’s anguish. He shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh, God! John!”

-Back in the dining room, Michael keeps the knife in John’s chest and starts walking away. John wearily watches as Michael steps back towards the kitchen entrance.

John Strode: “Argh…Argh…”

-Back in the TV room, Tommy approaches the closed door to the dining room. He can vaguely hear John.

John Strode: “…Argh…Argh…”

-Tommy walks up to the door and braces himself. It sounds like John is hurt. But is Michael in there waiting for him? Is this a trap?

-Back in the dining room, John lays on the table in anguish.

John Strode: “…Argh…Argh…”

-The TV room door slowly opens and Tommy walks in. Upon seeing John, he immediately runs over.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh my gosh! John!”

John Strode: “…Argh…Argh…”

Tommy Doyle: “Oh my gosh…”

-Tommy looks around the dining room and doesn’t see any sign of Michael. He then turns back to John. He turns his attention to the kitchen knife stabbed into John’s chest.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh, God, I have to get this out. And I have to get you out of here.”

John Strode: “…Argh…Argh…”

-Tommy takes hold of the knife and begins pulling it out (Shi-i-i-i-ing). John feels the sting.

John Strode: “Oh, God! Ahhh!”

-Tommy stops and lets go of the knife. He braces himself. He then turns to John and shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “All right! I’m going to pull it out quickly! Like pulling off a bandaid!”

John Strode: “Just do it! Argh!”

-Tommy takes hold of the knife and braces himself. For the first time, he is genuinely afraid. Of Michael and for John. He read the occult book and tried everything he could to stop Michael. Now, he doesn’t know what is enough to stop him.

John Strode: “…Argh…Argh…”

-Tommy continues taking hold of the knife. He then shrugs and finally whips it out of John’s chest (Sha-shing!).

John Strode: “Argh! ARGH! Aaaahhh!”

Tommy Doyle: “John, I’m sorry! I had to do it!”

John Strode: “I know…Argh…I understand…Ahhh…”

Tommy Doyle: “All right, let’s forget about Michael and this damn house. I have to get you to the hospital. Here…”

-Tommy carefully helps John off of the table.

John Strode: “…Ahhh…Ahhh…”

-Tommy helps John off of the table and onto the wooden floor. Together, they start making their way to the open doorway to the TV room. They step into the doorway and into the TV room. They make their way through the TV room and begin approaching the front entrance. As they do, John wearily speaks up.

John Strode: “The door...Ahh…Michael jammed it…try the window…Ahh…”

Tommy Doyle: “All right, I will.”

-Tommy helps John to the front of the TV room and over to the open window. And next thing he knows, he is attacked by Michael (Thwonk!). John collapses to the floor (Thud!), while Michael slams Tommy into the side wall (Thud!).

Tommy Doyle: “Argh!”

-Tommy instantly drops the kitchen knife upon impact (Sha-shing!). Michael steps back and forces Tommy into the front entrance. He forces Tommy into the front entrance and throws him into the living room (Thud!).

Tommy Doyle: “Ooof!”

-Tommy gets up to his knees. He looks up and immediately sees Michael stepping into the room.

Tommy Doyle: “Oh, God!”

-The suspenseful “Halloween” theme begins playing. Tommy stands himself back up and steps back. Michael steps forward with his dead-like eyes fixed on him. Tommy continues stepping back. Not knowing what else to do, he stops and faces Michael.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael!”

-Michael stops and faces Tommy. Tommy continues facing Michael. Not knowing what else he can do at this point, he begins chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael, feel the power of Thorn…”

-Michael immediately begins stepping forward. Tommy begins stepping back.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow it to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Tommy steps back towards the kitchen entrance and continues chanting.

Tommy Doyle: “…Thorn believes in you. It wishes to free you of your torment…”

-Tommy steps out of the living room and back into the kitchen. As Michael follows him, Tommy looks into Michael’s dead-like eyes. Is Michael really afraid of him completing this chant? Was he really afraid of the chant being completed earlier in the evening?

Tommy Doyle: “…Don’t listen to the torment. Listen to Thorn. Ignore the torment and allow Thorn to become one with your body…”

-Tommy starts stepping back towards the other end of the kitchen. He continues chanting, while Michael continues stepping after him.

Tommy Doyle: “…And also feel the power of Wunjo. Allow Wunjo also to flow through your body. Allow it to flow through your blood stream and every blood vessel…”

-Michael continues stepping after Tommy like a man on a mission. He cannot afford to let Tommy finish the chant. Tommy, realizing that Michael is catching up, quickens his pace.

-Cut to the dining room. The kitchen door opens and Tommy steps out.

Tommy Doyle: “…Wunjo also believes in you. It wishes to free you of Thorn’s torment…”

-Michael steps into the dining room after Tommy.

TO BE CONTINUED IN THE NEXT POST...
Reply With Quote
  #31  
Old 06-03-2012, 12:20 AM
Halloween 9: The Legacy of Michael Myers - Final Part

THE FOLLOWING STORY IS INTENDED TO BE ENJOYED AND JUDGED. HOWEVER, IT IS NOT TO BE REPLICATED FROM THIS THREAD OR OTHERWISE. THANK YOU AND ENJOY.

Tommy Doyle: “…Continue listening to Thorn. Listen to the anger and hatred it has to offer…”

-Cut to the TV room. The dining room door opens and Tommy steps out. Notably, both John and Michael’s knife are missing.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow yourself to become consumed by it. And continue listening to Wunjo…”

-Michael steps into the TV room after Tommy. Tommy continues stepping back, while Michael continues stepping after him. Tommy braces himself and tries stepping back at a quicker pace. Just like before, he is almost done the chant. But will it genuinely affect Michael? And did it affect him before?

Tommy Doyle: “…Listen to the harmony and love it wishes on your soul. And allow it to overcome the emptiness of Thorn…”

-Tommy steps back towards the side entrance to the front.

Tommy Doyle: “…Allow both Thorn and Wunjo to become one and cancel each of their powers out…”

-Tommy walks out of the TV room and into the front entrance. Michael, keeping up with him, steps into the front entrance and reaches for Tommy. Tommy steps back and prevails.

Tommy Doyle: “…Now!”

-The suspenseful “Halloween” theme stops cold. Michael steps after Tommy and then stops. Both of his outstretched arms miss Tommy and then lower. Michael faces Tommy, then turns away. He steps a foot back and grasps his Halloween-masked head. Just like before, it appears something is stirred up inside him. Tommy looks around for John. Where has he gone to? He then takes notice of John in the front hallway. He is barely standing back up on his own. He is laying against the side wall.

-Tommy looks on at Michael. He bravely steps closer up to him. He steps around and tries looking Michael face to masked-face. He tries looking into Michael’s dead-like eyes as he continues grasping his head.

-Tommy then steps back and shrugs. It suddenly occurs to him why the spell didn’t work before. When they finished chanting, they didn’t allow a moment for the spell to sink in. Drew, Russ and Gary immediately began firing at Michael and prevented the spell from freeing Michael of the evil. This time, nothing is preventing Michael’s soul from fighting back against Thorn and physically taking control of his body.

-Both John and Tommy witness as Michael continues grasping his Halloween-masked head for another moment. And then, he lets go. His arms go limp and his head sags over. Tommy begins stepping back over to Michael. He steps within three feet of him and bravely speaks up.

Tommy Doyle: “Michael?”

-Michael picks his head up and looks over at Tommy. He is no longer breathing heavily. Michael continues looking on at Tommy. He then reaches up and grasps the white Halloween mask over his head. He takes hold of the back flaps of the mask and starts pulling it off. Very slowly, the mask wrinkles up as Michael pulls off the object that helped hide his emotion from the rest of the world for years.

-Tommy watches with amazement at what he is witnessing. Michael is truly free. The evil is gone. John, however, pushes himself away from the wall and struggles to step forward.

John Strode: “Ahhh…”

-John steps towards Michael and raises the kitchen knife (Shi-i-i-i-ing). Despite what he is witnessing, he is still intent on making Michael pay for Thorn’s actions. Tommy continues watching as Michael proceeds to pull off the white Halloween mask. He then takes notice of John as he steps up to Michael with the knife. He shrugs.

Tommy Doyle: “John, don’t!”

-John turns to Tommy, then back over to Michael. As Michael is about to pull the white Halloween mask off his unseen face, John steps up behind him and stabs the kitchen knife into his back (Sha-shing! Splatter!).

-As Michael instantly lets go of the mask, the camera starts rolling in slow motion. The mask, mostly removed from his head, slowly falls from his fingers and into gravity. Gravity catches the mask and slowly lowers it to the wooden floor. The camera slowly pans to the floor as the mask lands on it. It then slowly pans up.

-The camera slowly pans back up to Michael’s head. And for the first time in years, it reveals his face. Hanging over his head is blonde hair. It is long and messy. Ultimately revealed is the face of a forty-eight year old man. Visible are some lines and wrinkles. Also visible is some slight scarring. Much of the scarring is old, while the rest of it is fresh. The burns he suffered in 1978 and 2002 are still there to show.

-The camera starts rolling back in regular motion. As it does, Michael expresses his facial muscles and uses his vocal chords for the first time in years. And he shrieks.

Michael Myers: “Aaaahhh!”

-John, losing his balance, continues grasping the kitchen knife. As he drops to his knees, the knife slashes further down Michael’s back (Shi-i-i-i-ing!...Spla-a-a-a-ater!...).

Michael Myers: “Aaaahhh! Aaaaahhhh!”

-John finally loses his grasp on the kitchen knife and collapses to the wooden floor (Thud!). The knife stays put in Michael’s back and it is too much for him to bear.

Michael Myers: “Aaaaahhhh! Aaaaahhhh! Aaahh…”

-Michael also collapses to the wooden floor of the front entrance (Thud!). Tommy, seeing both of them down, can’t believe what is happening. He gets down to his knees and tries to help John.

Tommy Doyle: “John! John! Answer me!...”

-As Tommy tries helping John, the camera pans up above both of them and also Michael. The screen slowly fades to white. And then to black.

-Cut to the dark screen. It slowly fades in to reveal another day. It is mid-afternoon and the townspeople are at the cemetery honoring those that died that Halloween.

-Attending the grave of Milo Thatcher are his family, as well as Drew, Russ and Gary. Milo’s widow looks like she’s on the verge of tears. She turns to her children, then over to her deceased husband’s friends. She finally breaks down, and they console her. Drew then notices Lindsey walking over to Benny’s grave.

-Lindsey walks up to Benny’s grave. She faces it and Drew walks over. He looks down at the grave, then turns to Lindsey. Lindsey turns to Drew. She then sighs and Drew catches her in his arms. Lindsey looks over Drew’s shoulder with dry eyes. She’s done crying. She has to move on without Benny.

-Cut to the grave of Judith Myers. The understated “Halloween” theme begins playing, and the camera pans past it. It pans over to the grave belonging to Peter Myers. It next pans over to the grave belonging to Margaret Myers. It then passes a few unrelated graves. And finally, it pans over to the grave belonging Laurie Strode. As it stands, Kara’s family and all the others who personally experienced Halloween in 1988, 1989 and 1995 never officially lived or died in Haddonfield.

-The camera passes Laurie’s grave, and pans up behind the next one. It stays put behind the tombstone of that grave and focuses on Kara, Danny and Tommy as they walk up to it. The understated “Halloween” theme tones down. They all look down at the grave and sigh. Kara then speaks up.

Kara Strode: “It’s not fair. We were just getting to know him.”

-Kara looks on at the grave, then looks over at two other nearby ones. She then looks back at the first one and turns to Tommy.

Kara Strode: “It was supposed to be over. How could they take both of them away from us?”

-Tommy looks on at all three graves, then turns to Kara.

Tommy Doyle: “It is over now. John made a choice. When we weren’t able to stop Thorn together, he felt compelled to put an end to Thorn by himself. And he succeeded. He finished it.”

-Kara looks on at the first grave and sighs. And the camera finally cuts to the front of the first tombstone: John Strode. His date of death is marked “October 31, 2005.”

-The camera also cuts to the second tombstone: John Doe. His date of birth is marked “1995,” and his date of death is marked “October 31, 2005.” As it turns out, officials were able to determine the approximate age of Stephen Lloyd. Yet, oddly enough, they were unable to identify who he was. Tommy looks on at the second tombstone, then turns to Kara and Danny.

Tommy Doyle: “What matters is that we know. We know who he was, and we also know all the other people who used to be buried here. Including your family. We might not like that they’re still gone, but maybe it’s for the better that the rest of the world never finds out.”

Kara Strode: “Well, I don’t like it. I don’t like it at all.”

Tommy Doyle: “I don’t think we have a choice in the matter. If we tell others about what happened this Halloween and what happened on Halloween in the past, they’ll come after us. And if we stay quiet about it, they’ll leave us alone. They’ll let us live our lives again.”

Danny Strode: “I don’t like it, either. But I can deal with it. I’m glad to be Danny Strode again.”

-Watching them are deputies Eldridge and Williams (the two deleted Druid deputies referred to earlier in the story). They silently talk amongst themselves and watch Kara, Danny and Tommy from a distance.

-As the three of them look on at the three graves, Lindsey, Drew, Russ and Gary walk over. All four of them look down at John Strode’s and John Doe’s graves. They also look over at the third grave. Drew then turns to Tommy.

Drew Mackenzie: “It’s finally over…right?”

-Tommy looks over at the other nearby grave, then turns back to Drew.

Tommy Doyle: “Right.”

-All seven of them look on at the three graves for a moment. Then, they start walking away. As they do, deputies Eldridge and Williams continue watching them. They continue walking away, and both deputies continue watching their every move. And suddenly, Tommy stops and looks back at them. He’s noticed them watching and knows by now whose side they’re on.

-Eldridge and Williams look on at Tommy and stop talking amongst themselves. Drew unexpectedly also stops and turns his attention to them as well. Tommy and Drew both look on at the deputies. And the deputies look on at Tommy and Drew. Tommy and Drew then turn to each other and continue walking away. This is where they walk away from the darkness and move on.

-Eldridge and Williams watch them walk away, then continue to talk amongst themselves. As they do, two people dressed in black walk past them. The camera focuses on the silver-tipped boots and cane one of them is using to carry himself. It also focuses on the black heels the second one is wearing. It continues focusing on both of them as they walk over to the other nearby grave. And it pans behind the tombstone and finally focuses on the two people. They are, none other than, Dr. Terence Wynn and Melinda Wynn.

Dr. Wynn: “His journey now ends. He can now rest. And in peace.”

Melinda Wynn: “This isn’t what I wanted. This isn’t what Thorn wanted. I failed.”

Dr. Wynn: “No, you didn’t. I did. When I appointed you leader, you inherited my debt. You only started where I left off. It was my direction and vision that ultimately failed. Your vision for Thorn was unique. It brought Thorn that much closer to its destiny than mine ever did. You succeeded in guiding Thorn after its initial target: Ms. Strode. You also succeeded at rounding up the loose ends my leadership created, and guided them back in Thorn’s direction. You did everything Thorn asked of you.”

Melinda Wynn: “Then, what went wrong?”

Dr. Wynn: “It was Thorn. As well as the baggage you inherited from me. Your direction was only able to carry Thorn so far. Thorn was unable to live up to its destiny, because of the problems left over from my reign as leader. Thorn won’t blame you.”

Melinda Wynn: “Why do you speak of your leadership that way? I believed in you. We all believed in you. We still do.”

Dr. Wynn: “That’s flattering to hear. But it is ultimately each of the Runes that decide whether one leadership succeeds or fails. And I failed. You, you’re still in the beginning of your journey. You will have another opportunity to guide Thorn. And this time, from the beginning.”

-Melinda looks back, then turns to Wynn.

Melinda Wynn: “What about them? They know about us.”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes, they certainly do. However, as long as they stay quiet and keep our secret hidden from the outside world, we’re best off leaving them alone. They’re not the only ones to defy Thorn and live to not tell about it. Others have lived to tell about it and have suffered the consequences. If they persist in exposing us, we will know. And they will suffer the consequences.”

-Melinda looks on at the grave, then sighs.

Melinda Wynn: “Doesn’t it bother you that we came this close to making the prophecy come true? Don’t you feel cheated? I do. I should have done more for Thorn. I could have planned more. If your leadership really caused that much damage to Thorn’s destiny, I should have stepped in and…”

Dr. Wynn: “My dear, stepping in Thorn’s way was my gravest mistake. There was no more you could have done to help Thorn in its journey.”

Melinda Wynn: “Really?”

Dr. Wynn: “Yes. Why, you are as stubborn as I am. You have to let it go and move on. I was able to accept my mistakes and walk away from them long ago.”

Melinda Wynn: “Okay…”

-Both of them look on at the grave for a moment. Then, they start walking away. As they do, Melinda speaks up.

Melinda Wynn: “You know what the hard part is now? Waiting. We don’t know when Thorn is coming back.”

Dr. Wynn: “I know the feeling. You will learn soon enough that patience is a virtue. It also helps to remember the teachings…”

-The camera follows both of them as they walk away. It then turns around and begins panning over to the other nearby grave. As it does, the eerie “Halloween” theme begins picking up. The camera pans up to the grave and right up to the tombstone. Revealed on the front of it is the following: Michael Myers; October 19, 1957 – October 31, 2005. The camera sits there for a moment and the screen then fades to black.

-Cut to the dark screen. The eerie “Halloween” theme plays on and presented before the end credits is a message: In memory of Donald Pleasance, Debra Hill and Moustapha Akkad. The message begins scrolling up, followed by the end credits. The end.

Director commentary: The bodycount in this final sequel might be considered low, but I made some tough choices. I didn’t go the easy way out. That’s how I always saw the finale. John and Tommy both confronting Michael in one of the houses and each of them contributing to his demise. And Michael ultimately contributing to John’s demise. The stakes were high. It made sense to let Michael to kill off one of the main characters related to him before it was over.

Director commentary: When they planned the trap at the Doyle house, they were trying to be smart about it and create their own rules. And when John went out on his own to the Myers house, he threw the rules out the window and lined himself up as bait for Michael. What matters is that he really did succeed. Michael fatally wounded John, but John was able to kill Michael before he finally died.

Director commentary: If anyone has problems with how H9 turned out, I suppose it may concern it being over-written, needing a “script doctor,” and certainly the chant Tommy comes up with to free Michael of Thorn. Concerning the chracter development, I spared no expense. As proud as I am of H9, I realize that it is not perfect and there may be minor plot holes I overlooked. I certainly went out of my way to explain just about every story hole between the broken storylines. And never mind that I had to break this down from 323 pages to give it a reasonable “running time” on this message board.

Director commentary: If anyone found the constant use of Tommy’s chant during the main action annoying or possibly lame period, I get that. The notion of using black magic to stop Michael may not appeal to everyone. In the long run, it’s something I felt made sense to help defeat Michael, or rather Thorn. Tommy used a chant to stop Michael in his tracks in “Halloween 6,” and that gave birth to the chant in this one. And the other Rune used in the chant, “Wunjo,” is as real as “Thorn” is in the Druid handbook. Thorn does stand for darkness, or “evil,” and Wunju does stand for peace, or “good.”

Director commentary: I honestly tried for suspense over too high a bodycount and too much gore. I also tried to make it scary and terrifying if possible. I want to think I succeeded. But to be unbiased, I can’t be the judge of that. It’s up to you to be the judge. I hope you liked it.

THE END



























































THE END (BEWARE OF SPOILERS ABOVE)


























































THE END (BEWARE OF SPOILERS ABOVE)












































































THE END (BEWARE OF SPOILERS ABOVE)

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 10-26-2012 at 04:06 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #32  
Old 06-03-2012, 12:28 AM
That was "Halloween 9," and I hoped you all liked it. After finishing this in 2009, I wrote one more fan-fiction sequel - "Helloween," the "Halloween/Hellraiser" cross-over that became a rumor-to-go-nowhere after the success of "Freddy vs. Jason." Don't believe it's plausible? Well, it is just as plausible as H9 was. Although H9 and "Helloween" are definitely on different playing fields and dimensions to a fair degree. It follows the first three "Hellraiser" films and the "Halloween 6" storyline. I've been sitting on "Helloween" since early 2010 and also wish to share it with the fans. And having just finished posting H9, I will wait a while before posting "Helloween."
Reply With Quote
  #33  
Old 06-06-2012, 05:17 AM
I've sure taken quite the slumber from here and now I'm back. It's all thanks to you Duke after coming across your comment on the Halloween 6 board over on IMDb and was surprised to learn that you had posted this script of yours. I hope to read it soon and you sure have a lot of story to tell here. I gave up from working on mine over a year ago but now I'm trying to get back into it. I know the story will involve John Tate, Sara Moyer, Myles Barton, Lindsey Wallace, and a cameo by Freddie Harris. I know you tried to reconnect H4-H6 into the H20-H:R continuity, but are you willing to see how I handled things I plan to display in my story? I'll PM it to you if you like.
Reply With Quote
  #34  
Old 06-06-2012, 09:36 AM
I'm going to read it after I read another fellow Schmoe's book (XNightcrawler), as I had promised it to him a long time ago and even began reading it before school work got in the way. I plan on going through this all in one night, though, as I usually do scripts. I plan on it, for sure, Duke! Congratulations again for this monumental achievement for both yourself and the Halloween community.
Reply With Quote
  #35  
Old 06-07-2012, 06:12 PM
Read it when you're ready, Genie. Take up your other obligations first. H9 is now fully posted and here to stay until the end of the world on December 21st But if nothing happens, maybe somebody out there will notice and finally take interest. And if not it, it doesn't matter. I did it for the fans first.

Hey, Orlok. I did post H9 after all. And I have nothing to lose. Hardly enough people care anymore about the original series. Back in 2010, you were tuning into this monster just as I was tuning out and moving on. I feel like I have moved on from writing anymore fan-fiction, but I had to post this. Don't feel like sitting on it or "Helloween" any longer. Will that post that, too. By all means, share your progress and homework on your own H9/H10. I'm back in "Halloween-mode," so I'm ready get back in the garage and work on that old car again.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-07-2012 at 07:07 PM..
Reply With Quote
  #36  
Old 06-23-2012, 01:47 PM
H9 has spent enough time in the "Top Ten Box-office." It is now time to release "Helloween." I will re-read it this weekend and post it next week.
Reply With Quote
  #37  
Old 06-25-2012, 07:46 PM
I am still going over "Helloween" at the moment. I'm taking my time and want to get it right. It's been two years since writing it, and I forgot much of it over time, but my gosh! Sometimes, you write something, then move on, and re-discover it later and can't believe you wrote it. You have difficulty believing that you were in the right frame of mind to write something so unbelievably whacked-out and outside of your comfort zone. Admittedly, I was in a dark place when I wrote it. If I wasn't, I most likely would not have been able to write it at all.

Well, "Helloween" is basically "Halloween 666: The Producer's Cut" and "Hellbound: Hellraiser II" rolled into one. H6 was already a radically different sequel to follow after H1-2-4-5, but "Helloween" takes it to another level. That might already tell you if this particular take of "Helloween" is your cup of tea. But hell, even if you didn't like the new direction and ideas presented in H6, this is "Halloween" fused with "Hellraiser." You might warm up to it anyway.

At the risk of sounding biased, I really think all of you are going to like this, or at least find some things to like in it. It's a different and darker "Halloween" and a return to the old-school "Hellraiser" series before it lost its focus. It features Pinhead and the three original Cenobites who stood by his side, and they all have their moments to shine. It should be ready to be posted Wednesday.

Last edited by Duke Nukem; 06-25-2012 at 07:49 PM..
Reply With Quote
Reply

Bookmarks

Thread Tools
Display Modes

Posting Rules
You may not post new threads
You may not post replies
You may not post attachments
You may not edit your posts

BB code is On
Smilies are On
[IMG] code is On
HTML code is Off

Forum Jump